JP6866084B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a bullet-type pachinko gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a production control board that controls the production of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display on the game board and the characters. In some pachinko gaming machines, the operation of the effect button is urged to the player during the variable display of the special symbol or during the special game, and the operation of the effect button is triggered to advance the effect. There is something to do. Patent Document 1 is a document that discloses a technique related to the production of this type of gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-98143

By the way, the operation effect of this kind of gaming machine is merely to drop a character or to make a character appear by operating an effect button, and there is room for improvement in terms of the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to further enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention displays a symbol based on an operating means, a determining means for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a determination result of the determining means. The symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol showing the determination result after the symbol is variablely displayed by the means, and the symbol display control means for stopping the symbol when it is determined that the determination means has won the jackpot. After displaying, based on the special game execution means for executing the special game corresponding to the winning jackpot and the judgment result of the judgment means, the dialogue is produced according to the predetermined operation for the operation means within the operation acceptance valid period. A non-speech operation that is executed after the dialogue operation effect, which is an effect in which an effect different from the dialogue effect progresses in response to a predetermined operation on the operation means within the operation acceptance valid period. The effect control means for causing the effect means to execute one or a plurality of effects among the plurality of effects including the effect and the specific advance notice effect suggesting the mode of progress of the effect after the operation, and the effect control means are described above. When the non-speech operation effect is executed as an effect during variable display that is supposed to stop at a symbol indicating that the determination result is a big hit, the specific advance notice effect is executed before the non-speech operation effect is executed. When the non-speech operation effect is to be executed as an effect during the variable display that is supposed to stop at a symbol indicating that the determination result is not a big hit, the specification is made before the non-speech operation effect is executed. Provided is a gaming machine characterized by comprising a regulatory means for regulating the execution of a notice effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the operation and production of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which is 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the 1st movable accessory 330a in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 descended. It is a figure which shows the state that the 2nd movable accessory 330b in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 tilted. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of a jackpot in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the photo image and frame color of each stage in the step-up effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and the reliability of a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special symbol reservation storage area of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and the effect information storage area of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the pre-determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table and the ordinary symbol lottery determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special game control table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting table at the end of a special game of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing control processing of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead hold change effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table and the final stage hold display mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hold display change effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hold display change effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st accessory operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1st accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd accessory operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the 2nd accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the step-up effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up effect execution determination table and the step-up effect final stage determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the serif operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the dialogue operation effect execution determination table and the dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the dialogue operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the roulette operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the roulette operation effect execution determination table and the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the roulette operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the roulette operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gauge operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the reference destination determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the upper table 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the middle table and the lower table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation effect progress pattern determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the gauge operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timing operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing operation effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reach back button operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a step-up back button operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect selection process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round game effect control process of the effect control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the operation information storage area of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and the update example thereof. It is a figure which shows the production example of the gaming machine which is 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the gaming machine which is 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd accessory operation operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the gaming machine which is 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the entire gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that visually covers the gaming area 6 of the outer frame 60.

One end of the glass door 50 (on the left side facing the gaming machine 1) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side facing the gaming machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked with a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism portion 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18a for detecting the opening of the glass door 50.

On the outside of the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the second special symbol hold indicator 24, and ordinary A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold indicator 25 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “starting prize”). Is. The second special symbol display device 21 notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “starting prize”). is there. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified by each. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are composed of 7-segment LEDs. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately referred to as the "second special symbol". It is called "design".

The first special symbol hold indicator 23 displays the number of pending changes in the first special symbol. The second special symbol hold indicator 24 displays the number of pending changes in the second special symbol.

Here, the suspension of the change of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition that was established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the first special symbol was satisfied by the start winning of the first start port 14. It occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

Similarly, the suspension of the change of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition that was established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the second special symbol was satisfied by the start winning of the second start port 15. It occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

Each of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. More specifically, the display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24 will be described. In the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the number of holds for changes in the first special symbol is In the case of one, the left LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is two, the LED on the right lights up. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is 3, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is 4, the two LEDs on the left and right blink. The display mode of the number of holds in the second special symbol hold indicator 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold indicator 23.

The ordinary symbol display device 22 notifies the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed when the game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 13. The ordinary symbol display device 22 variablely displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols that can be identified from each other. The ordinary symbol hold indicator 25 displays the number of pending changes in the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold indicator 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold indicator 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24.

The gaming area 6 of the gaming machine 1 has a substantially oval shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side and a right area 6R on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. At the left end of the left region 6L, rails 5a and 5b are provided between the rails 5a and 5b which extend in an arc shape with a space slightly wider than that of the game ball. Of these rails 5a and 5b, a ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b.

Three left and right lighting devices (lamps) 34 are provided slightly inside the left and right corners of the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1. The effect lighting device 34 produces a game by emitting light under the control of the lamp control board 140.

Audio output devices 32 (speakers) are provided inside the three left and right lighting devices 34 for directing the upper part of the glass door 50 of the game machine 1. The audio output device 32 produces a game effect (output of various background music (BGM) and sound effects) by sound under the control of the image control board 150.

An effect button 35 is provided under the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by pressing. The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a. When the effect button detection switch 35a detects that the effect button 35 has been pressed, the effect button detection switch 35a outputs an on signal indicating that fact.

A cross key 39 is provided on the left side of the effect button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

The up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The central key 39E is provided with a central key detection switch 39e. When the cross key detection switch 39a detects that the upper cursor key 39A has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39b detects that the down cursor key 39B has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39c detects that the left cursor key 39C has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the cross key detection switch 39d detects that the right cursor key 39D has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact. When the central key detection switch 39e detects that the central key 39E has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that fact.

A saucer for storing game balls is provided on the back side of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. An operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. The player performs a firing operation, which is an operation of holding the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and turning it clockwise.

A touch sensor 3a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is composed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance due to contact with the operation handle 3 of the player. A ball feed solenoid 4b is provided on the saucer of the glass door 50. The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided in the vicinity of the rotating portion of the operation handle 3. The firing volume 3b is composed of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

Each of these parts 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b performs an operation related to launching the game ball into the game area 6 in the saucer under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating that to the firing control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the firing volume 3b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 3 to the firing control board 160. The firing control board 160 controls to energize the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is being supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

By the energization control of the launch control board 160, the ball feed solenoid 4b feeds the game balls in the saucer one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the launching member. The game ball sent out from the saucer toward the launching member is launched between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the launching member, and is guided by the rails 5a and 5b to rise. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b passes through the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls unpredictably in the game area 6.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. As a result, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid 4a. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

A decorative member 7 that affects the flow of the game ball is provided in the upper part of the game area 6. Directing drive devices 33a and 33b are provided at the back of the decorative member 7 at the upper part of the game area 6 and at the right end of the game area 6. The effect drive devices 33a and 33b produce a game by the movement of the device itself under the control of the lamp control board 140. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the effect driving device 33a has an annular first movable accessory 330a and an actuator that supports the upper edge thereof. When the effect driving device 33b receives a signal instructing the driving of the first movable accessory 330a from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33b is located at a position (position shown in FIG. 1) on the back side of the decorative member 7 above the game area 6. The first movable accessory 330a is lowered to the central position (position shown in FIG. 4) of the game area 6. As shown in FIG. 5, the effect driving device 33b has a stick-shaped second movable accessory 330b and an actuator that supports the lower end thereof. When the effect driving device 33b receives a signal instructing the driving of the second movable accessory 330b from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33b moves the second movable accessory 330b from the rightmost position (position shown in FIG. 1) of the game area 6. It is tilted toward the central position (position shown in FIG. 5) of the game area 6.

A plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided below the left area 6L in the game area 6. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting the passage of a game ball in the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

A first large winning opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the game area 6. The first large winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the first large winning opening 16. When the first large winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The first special winning opening 16b is provided with a first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c for switching the opening / closing of the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b. There is. The first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the first large winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is swingably pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first large winning opening 16. When the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the first winning opening 16. When the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in an open state tilted forward with the lower edge of the first winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

While the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball falling from above the first large winning opening 16 passes in front of the first large winning opening 16 as it is. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the first large winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first prize opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first winning opening 16b face upward of the first winning opening opening / closing door 16b. It hits the saucer surface and is guided to the side of the first large winning opening 16. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the first large winning opening 16.

A second big winning opening 17 is provided in the lower center of the game area 6. The second large winning opening 17 is provided with a second large winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the second large winning opening 17. When the second large winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The second special winning opening 17b is provided with a second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c for switching the opening / closing of the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b. There is. The second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the second large winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second prize opening opening / closing door 17b is swingably pivotally attached to the lower edge of the second prize opening 17. When the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and closes the second winning opening 17. When the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in an open state tilted forward with the lower edge of the second winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

While the 2nd prize opening opening / closing door 17b is closed, the game balls falling from diagonally above the right and diagonally above the left of the 2nd prize opening 17 pass in front of the 2nd prize opening 17 as they are. To do. Therefore, while the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the second large winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second prize opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second winning opening 17b face upward of the second winning opening opening / closing door 17b. It hits the saucer surface and is guided to the side of the second large winning opening 17. Therefore, while the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the second large winning opening 17.

Above the second big winning opening 17 in the lower center of the game area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged in the vertical direction. The first start port 14 is provided with a first start port detection switch 14a for detecting the passage of a game ball at the first start port 14. When the first start port detection switch 14a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out.

The second start port 15 is provided with a second start port detection switch 15a that detects the passage of the game ball at the second start port 15. When the second start port detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out.

A pair of movable pieces 15b are provided at the second starting port 15. The open / closed state of these movable pieces 15b is switched by the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c. When the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned off, each of the pair of movable pieces 15b is in an upright closed state. When the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in an open state tilted in an inverted C shape. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "electric chew") as an ordinary electric accessory. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls that fall from the diagonally upper left and right of the second starting port 15 toward the second starting port 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and bounce off. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the game balls that fall from diagonally above the left and right of the second starting port 15 toward the second starting port 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. It reaches the second starting port 15. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15.

A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly upward from the first large winning opening 16 in the right region 6R of the game region 6. The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage of a game ball at the normal symbol gate 13.

Here, in the gaming machine 1, a big hit is triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol by the starting prize of the first starting port 14, and the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol by the starting winning of the second starting port 15. When the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol stops at the symbol according to the type of jackpot after the variable display for a predetermined period, and this stop symbol indicates. A special game is executed according to the type of jackpot. In the special game, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 until the number of winnings of the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. The opening of the game is regarded as a one-round round game, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. There are the following seven types of jackpots for game machine 1.

a1. First 16R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are performed. In each of the 16 round games, the first large winning opening 16 is opened until the number of winnings of the first large winning opening 16 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds elapse → the first large for 2 seconds. The first large winning opening 16 is opened and closed in an opening / closing mode in which the winning opening 16 is closed.

When this jackpot is won, the gaming states related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game are the low probability gaming state (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 2/599) and the high probability gaming state (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery). Is 20/599), which is a high-probability gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when this jackpot is won, the game state related to the ordinary electric accessory (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game is changed to the electric chew support state (the movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time and the second starting port). Of the two states, the state in which 15 is easy to start winning and the non-electric chew support state (the state in which the movable piece 15b is difficult to open), the electric chew support state is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state related to the special symbol is changed. , Time shortened state (state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short) and non-time shortened state (state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long), which is advantageous for the player. It becomes. The state related to the normal electric accessory and the state related to the special symbol are subordinate to each other, and when the state related to the ordinary electric accessory becomes the electric chew support state, the state related to the special symbol becomes the time shortened state. In the following description, the state related to the normal electric accessory is the electric chew support state, and the state related to the special symbol is the time shortened state is called the "time saving game state", and the state related to the ordinary electric accessory is not. The state in which the electric chew support state and the state related to the special symbol is the non-time shortening state is called the "non-time saving game state".

In the gaming machine 1, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 1/65536, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 29 seconds, and the second starting port 15 for each winning of the normal symbol lottery is performed during the non-time saving game state. The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. In addition, during the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery. The opening time is 3.5 seconds.

b1. First 8R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. In the eight round games, the number of prizes in the second prize opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, nine) or the opening of the second prize opening 17 until 29 seconds have passed → The second prize in two seconds The second prize-winning opening 17 is opened and closed by closing the opening 17. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game will be a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

c1. 1st 8R Normal Hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the 1st special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second big winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

d1. First 2R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, two round games, the first round and the second round, are performed. In the two round games, the number of prizes in the second prize opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or the opening of the second prize opening 17 until 0.4 seconds elapses → the second for 2 seconds. The second large winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening / closing mode in which the large winning opening 17 is closed. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

f1. Second 16R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the first grand prize opening 16 in the 16 round games is the same as that of the first 16R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

g1. Second 8R Probability Change This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second big winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

i1. Second 8R normal hit This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second big winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

In the following description, the first 16R probability variation, the first 8R probability variation, the first 2R probability variation, the second 16R probability variation, and the second 8R probability variation are collectively referred to as "probability variation". .. Further, the first 8R normal hit and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as "normal hit" as appropriate. Further, the first 16R probability variation hit and the second 16R probability variation hit are collectively referred to as "per 16R probability" as appropriate. The first 8R probability variation hit, the first 8R normal hit, the second 8R probability variation hit, and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as "8R per hit" as appropriate. The first 2R probability variation hit is appropriately referred to as "2R hit".

Further, in the gaming machine 1, a normal symbol lottery for determining the winning or not of the winning of the normal symbol is executed when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied by the passage of the game ball of the normal symbol gate 13, and the winning is won in this normal symbol lottery. In this case, the movable piece 15b, which is usually an electric accessory, is opened for a predetermined period of time. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied.

An out port 11 is provided in the center of the bottom of the game area 6. A game ball that has reached the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning openings 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first major winning opening 16, and the second major winning opening 17. Is discharged through the out port 11.

An image display device 31 is fitted between the decorative member 7 and the first starting port 14 in the game area 6. The image display device 31 produces a game by displaying an image under the control of the image control board 150.

More specifically, the gaming machine 1 performs a symbol variation effect according to the symbol variation from the start to the stop of the special symbol variation. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the symbol variation effect, the image display device 31 has the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R). , 36Z is appropriately referred to as "directing symbol 36"). The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z have the first special symbol display device 20 and the second symbol display device 20 and the second symbol due to the fluctuation synchronized with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. The same jackpot determination result as that indicated by the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, and "6" symbol. There are "7" symbols, "8" symbols, and "9" symbols. Further, the display mode of the fourth symbol 36Z includes a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode.

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the start winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 starts, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R Each is "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8" symbol → "9" symbol → "1" A round display of symbols is started, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts a round display of a first display mode → a second display mode → a third display mode → a first display mode. When the special symbol stops after the fluctuation display over a predetermined fluctuation time T, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in the combination corresponding to the stopped display special symbol. , If the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z that are stopped and displayed is a big hit, the special game is executed. The type of jackpot notified by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z in the symbol variation effect always matches the type of jackpot notified by the special symbol.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, when the 16R probability variation hit is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either "333" or "777", and the fourth symbol 36Z is the third display mode. It stops with the combination.

If you win the 8R probability variation in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", "999". The fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the combination of the second display mode. If you win the 8R normal hit in the big hit lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", "999". The fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the combination of the first display mode.

When the 2R probability variation is won in the big hit lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z is the first display mode. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, it will stop in a combination that is neither of the above.

Here, the display size of the fourth symbol 36Z is extremely smaller than that of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. Therefore, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop at the same symbol combination other than "777" and "333", it is not possible to know whether the 8R probability variation hit or the 8R normal hit is won. It has become. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped by the symbol combination of "777" or "333", it is easy to know that the 16R probability variation is won at the time of the stop.

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop at a combination of jackpots to perform a special game, a special game effect is produced according to the special game. I do. In the special game effect, the image display device 31 displays an image for guiding the right-handed hit, an image showing the number of rounds of the round game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the image 37 (0) _{0 of the} fluctuation is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 31. If the first is pending variation of the special symbols, on the left side of the image of the variation in the image display device 31 37 (0), the image 37 of the _first hold the first special symbol (variation order is first hold) (1), image 37 ₁ (2) of the second hold (hold second in the order of change), image 37 ₁ (3) of the third hold (hold third in the order of change), and fourth hold (change) sequentially up to four images of an image 37 1 ₍₄₎ of the 4 th hold) is displayed.

When there is a hold of the change of the second special symbol, the image of the first hold (the first hold in the order of change) in the second special symbol is on the right side of the image 37 (0) of the change in the image display device 31. 37 ₂ (1), second hold image ₃₇ 2 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 2 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold up to four images of an image 37 2 of the (variation order is 4 th hold) ₍₄₎ is displayed. Here, in FIG. 6B, only images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) are shown for the sake of simplicity.

When the number of hold displays of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 increases, images 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of holds after the increase are displayed. Appear. When hold display number of the second special symbol reservation display 24 is increased, the image ₃₇ 2 corresponding to the number of pending after the increase _(1), 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 (3), or ₃₇ 2 (4) Appear.

_{While the image 37 1} (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of hold displays of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is being displayed, the special symbol is displayed once. Every time the fluctuation of the fluctuation is completed, the image 37 (0) of the fluctuation disappears, the image 37 ₁ (1) of the first hold moves to the position of the fluctuation image 37 (0) of the fluctuation, and the images after the second hold. 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) moves to the position to the right of each.

Image ₃₇ 2 corresponding to the hold display number of the second special symbol reservation display 24 _(1), 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 (3), or ₃₇ display in 2 (4), one of the special symbols Each time a change is completed, the image 37 (0) disappear in the variation, the first hold image 37 2 ₍₁₎ is moved to the position of the variation image 37 (0) of the variation, the second pending subsequent image 37 ₂ (2), ₃₇ 2 (3), or ₃₇ 2 (4) is moved to a position to the left of each.

In the following description, the image _{37 (0)} 37 1 (1), ₃₇ 1 (2), 37 1 _(3), 37 1 (4), 37 _{2 (1),} 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 ( 3), and ₃₇ 2 (4) appropriately called "hold display image 37".

Further, in the symbol variation effect, the gaming machine 1 has a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a full rotation reach effect, a re-lottery effect, and a first role based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the effect button 35. One or one of multiple types of effects including object operation effect, second character operation effect, pseudo-continuous effect, step-up effect, dialogue operation effect, roulette operation effect, gauge operation effect, timing operation effect, and specific advance notice effect. A plurality of effects are selected, and the selected one or a plurality of effects are executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. Further, in the special game production, the game machine 1 selects one or a plurality of productions from a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the production button 35, and selects 1 Alternatively, a plurality of effects are executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. The outline of each effect executed as a symbol variation effect or a special game effect is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 8A, a normal reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The normal reach effect may be executed at a predetermined time t _NR within the fluctuation time T of the special symbol. In the normal reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are in a reach state in which the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped while the middle symbol 36C is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the SP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. _{The SP reach effect may be executed at the time t SP} at the end of the symbol fluctuation (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “reach fluctuation”) accompanying the establishment of the reach (after the establishment of the reach). The SP reach effect is not executed for the symbol variation (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "normal variation") that does not involve the establishment of reach. The SP reach production is a development production that develops from the normal reach production. In the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated from each other in the left and right corners of the screen, and an animated character image by a plurality of characters is displayed in the center of the screen. The reliability of the jackpot when developing into SP reach production is higher than when it does not develop into SP reach production.

As shown in FIG. 8C, the SPSP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. _{The SPSP reach effect may be executed at the time t SPSP} at the end of the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In normal fluctuation, the SPSP reach effect is not executed. The SPSP reach production is a development production that develops from the normal reach production. In the SPSP reach effect, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated from each other in the left and right corners of the screen, and the recorded video of the singing by a plurality of characters is displayed in the center of the screen. The reliability of the jackpot when it develops into the SPSP reach effect is higher than when it does not develop into the SPSP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 8D, the full rotation reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The full rotation reach effect is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are varied while being aligned with the combination of the same type of symbols. _{The full rotation reach effect may be executed at the time t ZKT} at the end of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). The full rotation reach effect may be executed in the normal variation and the reach variation, or may be executed only in the reach variation. The full rotation reach effect is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops in the combination of jackpots).

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the re-lottery effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. _{The re-lottery effect may be executed at the time t SCHU} at the end of the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the normal fluctuation, the re-lottery effect is not executed. In the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped (displayed slightly shaking) in a combination that is not a combination peculiar to the 16R probability variation (either "333" or "777"). Stop in mode). After that, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R re-variate over a short period of time, temporarily stop again with the same or different symbol combination as before the temporary stop, and the temporary stop is performed when the special symbol is stopped. Keep up to.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the 16R probability variation is won, the symbol combinations at the time of temporary stop before re-variation are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666". , "888", and "999" ("222" in the example of FIG. 9A), and the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after re-variation is any of "333" and "777". (In the example of FIG. 9A, it is "777"). The effect in which the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after the re-variation is either "333" or "777" is a 16R probability variation hit confirmation effect (before the effect symbol 36 stops in a unique combination for the 16R probability variation hit). It is one of the effects of notifying.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation hit is won, the symbol combinations at the time of temporary stop before and after the re-variation are "111", "222", "444", and "555". , "666", "888", and "999" ("222" in the example of FIG. 9B).

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first accessory operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The first accessory operation effect is an effect of dropping the first movable accessory 330a triggered by the operation of the operation button 35. The first accessory operation effect may be executed during the period from _{time t AY0 to t AY2} at the end of the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the first accessory operation effect, the notification condition is that the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception valid period, and when the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the first accessory operation effect is performed. 1 The movable accessory 330a is dropped, thereby notifying the jackpot determination result.

More specifically, in the first _accessory operation effect, at time t AY0, an image imitating the effect button 35 and an indicator image showing the elapsed status of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35 appear, and at time t _AY1 . , A guidance image (character image of "press!") That prompts the operation of the effect button 35 appears. In the first _accessory operation effect, the period from the time t AY1 to the time t _AY2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker in the indicator image (the area hatched in the figure) is set according to the elapse of this period. Right end) goes to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. _{When the end time t AY2} of the operation acceptance valid period is reached without the pressing operation being performed, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t AY2. There are two modes of notifying the operation result: with and without falling of the accessory.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the effect of dropping the accessory, the first movable accessory 330a descends immediately after the pressing operation. The effect of lowering the first movable accessory 330a is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops in the combination of jackpots). When the first movable accessory 330a is lowered in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIG. 10B, in the effect of not dropping the accessory, the first movable accessory 330a does not descend regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the first _accessory operation specific notice effect may be executed at the time t'AY1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the first accessory operation effect. The first accessory operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35. In the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect, a movable accessory deja vu image showing the first movable accessory 330a in a semi-transparent manner appears.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, a second accessory operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The second accessory operation effect is an effect of tilting the second movable accessory 330b triggered by the operation of the effect button 35. The second accessory operation effect may be executed during the period from _{time t SY0 to t SY2} at the end of the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the second accessory operation effect, the notification condition is that the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception valid period, and when the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the second accessory operation effect is performed. 2 The movable accessory 330b is tilted to notify the development of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.

More specifically, in the second character operation effect, at time t _SY0 , an image imitating the effect button 35 and an indicator image showing the elapsed status of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35 appear, and at time t _SY1 . , A guidance image (character image of "press!") That prompts the operation of the effect button 35 appears. _{In the second accessory} operation effect, the period from the end time t _SY1 to the time t SY2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker in the indicator image (the area hatched in the figure) is set according to the elapse of this period. Right end) goes to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. _{When the end time t SY2} of the operation acceptance valid period is reached without the pressing operation being performed, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t SY2. The mode of notifying the operation result includes tilting of the accessory and no tilting of the accessory.

As shown in FIG. 11A, in the effect of tilting the accessory, the second movable accessory 330b is tilted immediately after the pressing operation. The effect of tilting the second movable accessory 330b is a development notification effect (an effect of notifying that the second movable accessory 330b will develop into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect before developing into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect). If the second movable accessory 330b is tilted in the variable display of the special symbol, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is subsequently executed.

As shown in FIG. 11B, in the effect without tilting the accessory, the second movable accessory 330b does not tilt regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, the second _accessory operation specific notice effect may be executed at the time t'SY1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the second accessory operation effect. The second accessory operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35. In the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect, a movable accessory deja vu image showing the second movable accessory 330b in a semi-transparent manner appears.

As shown in FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b), and 12 (c), a pseudo continuous effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the pseudo-variation including the temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous chance eye mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R and the subsequent re-variation display is repeated up to three times. Pseudo-ream chances are "112", "445", "556", "889", and "991". The first pseudo-variation in the pseudo-continuous production may be executed at the time t _GJ1 at the beginning of the normal variation or the reach variation (before the reach is established). Pseudo variation the second time at time _{t GJ2} after time _{t GJ1,} pseudo variation of the third time at time _{t GJ3} after time _{t GJ2,} may be performed, respectively. The reliability of the jackpot in the pseudo-continuous production increases as the number of pseudo-variations increases. The third pseudo-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect in which the pseudo-variation is three times is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops at the combination of jackpots). When the number of pseudo-variations reaches 3 in the variation display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), a step-up effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The step-up effect is a step-up effect from each stage within the normal stage up to 4 stages and a special stage that can proceed after passing the upper limit of the normal stage only when the jackpot is confirmed, to the stage designated as the final stage. Is a production that develops. _{The step effect of the normal stage 1 in the step-up effect may be executed at the time t SUP1 from} the early stage to the middle stage (before the reach is established) of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation. The step effect of the normal stage 2 is at the time t _SUP2 after the time t _SUP1 , the step effect of the normal stage 3 is at the time t _SUP3 after the time t _SUP2 , and the step effect of the normal stage 4 is the time t. at time _{t SUP4} later than _SUP3, step rendition of special stage at time _{t SUPS} after time _{t SUP4,} it may be performed, respectively.

In the step production of each stage from the normal stage 1 to the special stage of the step-up effect, a photo image of a girl peculiar to each stage is superimposed on the photo image of the previous stage. There are three color frames of the photo image appearing in the step effect of each step of the step-up effect: blue, green, and red. There is a development turning point between the stages before and after the step-up effect, and the frame color of the photo image is divided into a plurality of development destinations at the development turning point.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between the photo image and frame color of each stage in the step-up effect and the reliability of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 14, in the step-up effect, the higher the stage, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Also, for photo images at the same stage, the green frame has a higher reliability of the jackpot than the blue frame, and the red frame has a higher reliability of the jackpot than the green frame. In the step effect of the special stage, the background color in the frame in the photo image of the normal stage 4 becomes gold. This special stage step effect is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (effects that notify the effect symbol 36 before it stops at the combination of jackpots). When the step-up effect progresses to the special stage in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIG. 15A, a dialogue operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The dialogue operation effect is an effect in which the dialogue effect progresses in response to the operation of the effect button 35. The dialogue operation effect may be executed during the period from _{time t SR0 to t SR2} in the early stage of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (before the reach is established). In the dialogue operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation result is notified when the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period. To do.

More specifically, in the dialogue operation effect, at time t _SR0 , the balloon frame and the silhouette of character A → the silhouette of character B → the silhouette of character C → the silhouette of character D → the silhouette of character A are repeated. A silhouette image appears. At time t _SR1 , an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the elapsed status of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35, and a guidance image (character image of "press!") Prompting the operation of the effect button 35 appear. To do. In the dialogue operation effect, _{the period from the time t SR1} to the time t _SR2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set according to the elapse of this period. Go to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. The operation result notification modes include one in which character A appears as a dialogue speaker, one in which character B appears as a dialogue speaker, one in which character C appears as a dialogue speaker, and one in which character D appears as a dialogue speaker. is there. If the pressing operation is not performed within the operation reception valid period, the dialogue operation effect ends without proceeding to the notification of the operation result.

As shown in FIG. 15A, in the production in which the character A is the speaker of the dialogue, when the pressing operation is performed, the one-round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character A appears, and the character A appears in the balloon frame. Lines are displayed. In the production in which the character B is the speaker of the dialogue, when the pressing operation is performed, the one-round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character B appears, and the dialogue of the character B is displayed in the balloon frame. In the production in which the character C is the speaker of the dialogue, when the pressing operation is performed, the one-round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character C appears, and the dialogue of the character C is displayed in the balloon frame. In the production in which the character D is the speaker of the dialogue, when the pressing operation is performed, the one-round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character D appears, and the dialogue of the character D is displayed in the balloon frame. Of the characters A, B, C, and D, the reliability of the jackpot of the dialogue operation effect in which the character D is the dialogue speaker is higher than the dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B, and C are the dialogue speakers, but the trust of both. There is no big difference between degrees. The dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B, C, and D are the dialogue speakers is a production called a lively production, in which the influence on the reliability of the jackpot is negligible (cass production).

However, as shown in FIG. 15B, when a jackpot is won by a jackpot lottery, there is an extremely low probability that an image of a premium character may appear when the one-round display of the silhouette image is stopped. The effect in which the image of the premium character appears is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops at the combination of the jackpots). When the image of the premium character appears after the one-round display of the silhouette images of the characters A, B, C, and D in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally displayed. Stop display with a combination of jackpot symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (c), the dialogue operation specific notice effect is executed at _{the time t'SRF} before the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect in which the image of the premium character is to appear. In some cases. The dialogue operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the dialogue operation effect. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect, a premium character deja vu image showing the premium character in a semi-transparent manner appears in the balloon frame during the round display of the silhouette image.

As shown in FIG. 16A, a roulette operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The roulette operation effect is an effect in which the roulette effect progresses in response to the operation of the effect button 35. The roulette operation effect may be executed during the period from _{time t RL0 to t RL2} in the early stage of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (before the reach is established). In the roulette operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation result is notified when the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period. To do.

More specifically, in the roulette operation effect, at time t _RL0 , a roulette image that repeats a round display of “!” → “Change” → “NEXT” → “SP” → “!” Appears, and at time t _RL1 , An image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the elapsed status of the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and a guidance image (character image of "press!") Prompting the operation of the effect button 35 appear. In the roulette operation effect, _{the period from the time t RL1} to the time t _RL2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set according to the elapse of this period. Go to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation result is notified after waiting for the operation reception valid period to elapse. The mode of notifying the operation result includes one in which the roulette roll is "!", One in which the result is "Change", one in which the result is "NEXT", and one in which the result is "SP". If the pressing operation is not performed within the operation reception valid period, the roulette operation effect ends without proceeding to the notification of the operation result.

Here, "!" Suggests that it is unlikely to be a big hit. “Change” suggests that a normal reach effect may be executed in the variable display. "NEXT" suggests that a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed in the variable display. “SP” suggests that the SP reach effect may be executed in the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the effect that the roll of the roulette is “!”, The roulette image stops at “!” When the pressing operation is performed. In the production where the roll of the roulette is "Change", the roulette image stops at "Change" when the pressing operation is performed. In the production where the roll of the roulette is "NEXT", the roulette image is stopped at "NEXT" when the pressing operation is performed. In the production where the roll of the roulette is "SP", the roulette image stops at "SP" when the pressing operation is performed. Of "!", "Change", "NEXT", and "SP", the reliability of the jackpot of the roulette operation production in which the roulette roll is "!" And although it is higher than the reliability of the jackpot of the roulette operation production that becomes "SP", there is no big difference between the two. The roulette operation effect, in which "!", "Change", "NEXT", and "SP" are the roulette rolls, is called liveliness, and the effect on the reliability of the jackpot is negligible (cass effect). ). However, as shown in FIG. 16B, when a jackpot is won by a jackpot lottery, there is an extremely low probability that an image of a premium character may appear when the round display of the roulette image is stopped. The effect in which the image of the premium character appears is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops at the combination of the jackpots). When the image of the premium character appears after the round display of the roulette image in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16C, the roulette operation specific _{advance notice effect is executed at the time t'RL1} before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect in which the image of the premium character is to appear. In some cases. The roulette operation specific advance notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the roulette operation effect. In the roulette operation specific notice effect, a premium character deja vu image showing the premium character in a semi-transparent manner appears to the right of the roulette image being displayed in a circle.

As shown in FIGS. 17 (a), 17 (b), and 17 (c), a gauge operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The gauge operation effect is an effect of advancing a stepwise effect (an effect of increasing the points obtained to indicate the reliability of the jackpot) in response to the operation of the operation button 35. The gauge operation effect may be executed during the period from _{time t GG0 to t GG5} in the middle of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the gauge operation effect, the notification condition is that the pressing operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and if the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation reception valid period is set. The progress is waited for and the operation result is notified.

More specifically, in the gauge operation effect, a gauge image in the shape of a torch appears on the left side of the screen at _{time t GG0.} In the gauge image, the lower end of the progress range in the gauge image is set to 0 points, the upper end of the progress range in the gauge image is set to 10000 points, and the points obtained from 0 to 10000 are obtained (the hatched part in the figure). Depending on whether the upper side) rises, it shows the degree of expectation of development to SP reach production and SPSP reach production. There is a scale of "0" on the lower left of the extension range of the gauge image. On the upper left of the extension range of the gauge image, there is a scale of "10000". In the gauge operation effect, _{the period from the time t GG0} to the time t _GG3 is set as the first half of the progress period, and the gauge progress amount increases.

In the gauge operation effect, at time t _GG3 , the increase in the gauge progress amount stops once, and an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the lapse of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation of the effect button 35 are performed. A urging guidance image (character image of "press!") Appears. In the gauge operation effect, _{the period from time t GG3} to time t _GG4 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is on the right according to the elapse of this period. Proceed to. When the player presses the effect button 35 within the operation reception valid period or the end time t _GG4 of the operation reception valid period, the gauge progress resumes. In the gauge operation effect, the period from the restart of the gauge progress to the time t _GG5 is set as the second half of the progress period, and the gauge progress amount increases. At time t _GG5 , the gauge stops progressing and the final score is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the production in which the final score is 10,000 or more (10025 in the example of FIG. 17A) develops into the SPSP development production (before developing into the SPSP reach production). It is a production that informs what to do). When the final score of the gauge operation effect reaches 10,000 or more, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 17 (b), the effect in which the final score is 8000 or more (8275 in the example of FIG. 17 (a)) is an SP before the development notification effect (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect). It is an effect that notifies the development of a reach effect or an SPSP reach effect). When the final score of the gauge operation effect reaches 8000 or more, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the effect in which the final score is 3333 or 7777 is a 16R probability variation hit confirmation effect (an effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before stopping in a unique combination for the 16R probability variation hit). ). When the final score of the gauge operation effect reaches 3333 or 7777, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed with the symbol combination per 16R probability variation.

_{Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), a gauge operation specific advance} notice effect is given at the time t'GG3 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect, which is supposed to progress to the point acquisition stage of 8000 or more. May be executed. The gauge operation specific advance notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the gauge operation effect. In the gauge operation specific advance notice effect, a deja vu image showing the final acquisition point (10075 in the example of FIG. 17B) appears translucently on the right side of the gauge during the progress of the gauge.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, a timing operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The timing operation effect is an effect that notifies the presence or absence of development to a development effect (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) when the timing operation of the effect button 35 is successful. The timing operation effect may be executed during the period from _{time t TM0 to t TM5} in the middle of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after the reach is established). In the timing operation effect, it is a notification condition that an operation for the operation button 35 is accepted after displaying a guidance image prompting the operation for the effect button 35, and a pressing operation for pressing the operation button 35 at a predetermined timing is performed. When the pressing operation is performed at a predetermined timing, the notification of the operation result progresses.

More specifically, in the timing operation effect, at time _tTM0 , an image imitating the effect button 35 and a guidance image prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (the characters "Push in rhythm") are displayed at the lower center of the screen. Image) appears. At time t _TM1 , a line extends from the image of the effect button 35 in the lower center toward the upper left, and the first duplicate image of the effect button 35 appears ahead of it. At time t _TM2 , a line extends from the first duplicate image to the upper right, and the second duplicate image appears at the tip of the line. At time t _TM3 , a line extends to the left from the second duplicate image, and the third duplicate image appears at the tip of the line. At time t _TM4 , a line extends from the third duplicate image to the lower right, and the fourth duplicate image appears at the tip of the line. At time t _TM5 , a line extends from the fourth duplicate image toward the image of the effect button 35 in the center of the screen, and a pentagon having the images of the five effect buttons 35 as vertices is completed.

After the guide image disappears, the player can see the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 t _TM1 , the appearance timing of the second image t _TM2 , the appearance timing of the third image t _TM3 , and 4 The effect button 35 is pressed in accordance with the appearance timing t _{TM4 of the second image.} If the operation timing of the effect button 35 matches any of the appearance timings of the images of the first to fourth effect buttons 35, t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 , the single operation is successful. If the single operation is successful, the character image of "GOOD" appears as an effect of the effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the appearance timing. If the operation timing of the effect button 35 does not match any of the appearance timings of the image of the effect button 35, t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 , the single operation fails. If the single operation fails, a character image of "miss" appears as an effect of the effect mode according to the fact that the operation timing and the appearance timing do not match. The operation timing of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times matches the appearance timing of the images of the first to fourth effect buttons 35, t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 , and the operation is completed. A character image of "EXCELLENT" appears as an effect of an effect mode corresponding to the fact that the operation timing of the operation of the times matches all of the appearance timings.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the character image of "EXCELLENT" appears, the character image of "SP" may appear after the pentagon is completed. The effect in which the character image of "SP" appears is a development notification effect (an effect that notifies the development of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect before developing into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect). When the character image of "SP" appears in the variable display of the special symbol, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 19 (a), 20 (a), and 20 (b), a back button timing operation effect (hereinafter referred to as “back button operation effect”) is executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. May occur. The back button operation effect is an effect of notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won when the back button operation of the effect button 35 is successful.

The back button operation effect includes a reach back button operation effect and a step-up back button operation effect. The reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19 (a)) may be executed during the period before and after the _{reach establishment time t NR} within the reach fluctuation in which the special symbol is supposed to stop at the symbol indicating the jackpot. Is. The step-up back button operation effect may be executed in the normal stage within the normal fluctuation or reach fluctuation in which the special symbol is to stop at the symbol indicating the jackpot after passing through the step-up effect of the normal stage 4. from 2 of time _{t SU2} is a period of up to time _{t SU4} of normal stage 4.

In the reach back button operation effect, the operation for the operation button 35 is accepted without displaying the guidance image prompting the operation for the effect button 35, and the operation button 35 is notified that the operation button 35 is pressed in accordance _{with the reach establishment timing t NR.} As a condition, when _{the pressing operation is performed according to the timing t NR} of the reach establishment, the notification of the operation result progresses. More specifically, in the reach back button operation effect, if the operation timing of the effect button 35 _{matches the reach establishment timing t NR} , the back button operation is successful. When the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success notification voice (“transcendence cute”” is produced from the voice output device 32 as a production mode according to _{the operation timing of the operation button 35 matching the reach establishment timing t NR.} Audio) is output. The effect of outputting the back button operation success voice is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops in the combination of jackpots). When the back button operation success voice is output in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination.

In the step-up back button operation effect, the operation for the operation button 35 is accepted without displaying the guidance image prompting the operation for the effect button 35, and the operation button 35 is pressed at the four back button operation determination timings t _{UR1 in the step-up effect.} , triggered _{by t UR2, t UR3, t UR4} the notification condition that the repeated pressing operation is performed to match the, back button operation determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , battered operation tailored to _{t UR4} is performed As a result, the operation result is notified. In more detail, the step-up back button operation effect, if someone operation timings of a plurality of times of operation of the performance button 35 and all the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4, successful back button operation It becomes. Successful back button operation, the operation timing determination timing _t UR1 of the operation button _35, t _UR2, t _UR3, as effect of the representation embodiment according to fit with all _{t UR4,} back button operation on the performance symbols 36 A success image (text image of "Congratulations") is displayed. The effect of displaying the back button operation success image is one of the jackpot confirmation effects (the effect of notifying the effect symbol 36 before it stops at the combination of jackpots). When the back button operation success image is displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are finally stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the promotion effect may be executed as a part of the special game effect during the special game. The promotion effect is stopped at the symbol combination of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999" for the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. In the special game that is performed with this as an opportunity, at the beginning of the execution of the special game, it is not specified whether the 8R probability variation hit or the 8R normal hit was won, but which big hit was won in the middle of the special game. It is a directing to clarify. The promotion effect is executed during the period from _{T SKK to t RDE} , which is the time after the _{start time t S4R} of the fourth round of the special game. In the promotion effect, the notification condition is that the operation to the operation button 35 is accepted after displaying the guidance image prompting the repeated hit operation of the effect button 35, and the continuous hit operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35. When the number of repeated hits within the operation acceptance valid period reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the operation result is notified.

More specifically, in the promotion effect, at the time t _SKK , a character image of "Charge the gauge and get the probability change" appears in the center of the screen. At time t _RDS , a horizontally long rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the elapsed state of the continuous hit operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and a guidance image prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (““ The character image) of "Repeat hit!" Appears. In the gauge image, the left end of the progress range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the progress range of the gauge image is MAX, and the probability of probability variation jackpot is indicated by the amount of progress between MIN and MAX.

In the promotion effect, _{the period from time t RDS} to time t _RDE is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is moved to the right according to the elapse of this period. move on. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 35 within the operation reception valid period, the amount of progress in the gauge image advances to the right in accordance with the repeated hits. When the number of repeated hits of the effect button 35 within the operation acceptance valid period reaches 30, the operation result is notified when the number of repeated hits reaches a predetermined number of times. _{If the end time t RDE} of the operation acceptance valid period is reached without the number of repeated hits reaching 30, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t RDE. The mode of notifying the operation result includes promotion success and promotion failure.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the production of successful promotion, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches "MAX", and the character images of "success" and "congratulations on the probability change" are displayed. When the promotion success effect is executed in the special game, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 21B, in the promotion failure effect, the gauge progress amount stops in front of "MAX", and the character image of "failure" is displayed. When the promotion failure effect is executed in the special game, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 may execute the look-ahead hold display change effect when the change of the special symbol is held due to the start winning of the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. The look-ahead hold display change effect is an effect that suggests that there may be a big hit in the hold due to a change in the display mode of the hold display image 37.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), in the look-ahead hold display change effect, the change of the special symbol is held due to the start winning, and the hold (FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)). In the example of, when the look-ahead hold display change effect with the change corresponding to the first special symbol (third hold) as the final change is executed, the time t immediately after the start of each change from the start winning prize to the final change. _HH (In the examples of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the time immediately after the start of the fluctuation two before the final fluctuation t _HH (2), the time immediately after the start of the fluctuation immediately before the final fluctuation t _{At HH} (1), the time immediately after the start of the final fluctuation t _HH (0)), the display mode of the hold display image 37 corresponding to the final fluctuation changes to any of blue, green, and red. In the look-ahead hold display change effect, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of blue <green <red.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, a game information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown). ), RAM clear switch (not shown), etc. are provided. When the start-up operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130 to start the boards 110, 120, and 130.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 110 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110 m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is composed of a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

The input port of the main control board 110 includes a payout control board 130, a general winning port detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first starting port detection switch 14a, a second starting port detection switch 15a, and a first large winning port detection switch. 16a, the second prize opening detection switch 17a, the door opening switch 18a, the magnetic detection sensor 18b, and the vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a payout control board 130, a starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c, a first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, a second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, and a second special. A symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold display 23, a second special symbol hold display 24, a normal symbol hold display 25, and a game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated on the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads a program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer. Further, the main CPU 110a directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the displays 23 to 25, and transmits a command to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing. When the start operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and the game is ready for play, the jackpot random value (random value in the random range of 0 to 599), Special symbol random value (random value in the random range from 0 to 99), reach judgment random value (random value in the random range from 0 to 99), random value for special symbol variation (random value in the random range from 0 to 99) , While updating various random value values including normal symbol random values (random values in the random range of 0 to 65535) within each random number range, special symbol fluctuations, normal symbol fluctuations, and games such as special games Control progress.

Data such as a game control program is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. The main ROM 110b contains a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a hit determination table for the normal symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, and a large winning opening. Various tables such as an open / close control table and a setting table at the end of a special game are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. The main RAM 110c includes a special symbol hold storage area, a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol hold storage area, a normal symbol general electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, and a number of rounds (R). ) Storage area, number of balls entered in the large winning opening (C) Storage area, high-probability game flag storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, game state buffer, first special symbol hold number counter, second special symbol hold number counter, normal Various types of counters such as symbol hold count counter, high probability game count (X) counter, time reduction count (J) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, transmission data storage area for production, etc. A storage area is provided. Here, when the power is cut off, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by the backup power supply after adding a checksum, and when the power is restored, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored through the data check by the checksum. I'm getting it.

The power supply board 170 supplies the power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and also supplies the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 with a power interruption detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become equal to or lower than a predetermined value. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply including a capacitor. The power supply board 170 sets the power failure detection signal to a high level while the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value, and lowers the power failure detection signal to a low level when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value.

The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives a command generated by the main control board 110, and based on the received command, the image display executed by the image display device 31, the sound output executed by the sound output device 32, and the effect drive. It controls the operation performed by the devices 33a and 33b or the blinking performed by the effect lighting device 34. More specifically, the effect control board 120 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 110 from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates by the supplied power when the power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and operates by the power of the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

The sub CPU 120a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 120b and performs arithmetic processing based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the input signal from the timer, and lamps the corresponding command based on the processing. It is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. When the start operation is performed, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and the game is ready for play, the random number values for production 1 to 25 (each in a random number range of 0 to 99). While updating various random number values including (25 kinds of random number values) and the like within each random number range, the effect according to the progress of the game is controlled. Here, as for the effect random numbers 1 to 25, the same random number values are not acquired at the same time.

Data such as an effect control program is stored in the sub ROM 120b of the effect control board 120. Various tables such as a variation effect pattern determination table are stored in the sub ROM 120b. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. The sub-RAM 120c is provided with various storage areas such as an effect information storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a symbol variation effect pattern storage area, a game state storage area, and an effect pattern storage area.

The payout control board 130 controls the payout of the game ball. The payout control board 130 is bidirectionally communicatively connected to the main control board 110. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads the program stored in the payout ROM based on the input signal from the payout ball counting switch 132 and the timer and performs arithmetic processing, and based on the process, sends the corresponding command to the main control board 110. Send. A payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage portion of the game balls is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. Based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110, the payout CPU reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out a predetermined game ball. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

The lamp control board 140 controls the effect driving devices 33a and 33b and the effect lighting device 34. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. The lamp control board 140 controls energization of drive sources such as solenoids and motors that operate the effect drive devices 33a and 33b based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, and lights the light in the effect lighting device 34. It controls and controls the drive of the motor to change the light irradiation direction.

The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 is bidirectionally communicatively connected to the effect control board 120. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, VDP, and an acoustic DSP (not shown). The CPU of the image control board 150 executes a program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When a command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU controls the operation of the VDP and the acoustic DSP by generating a control signal according to the content of the command and outputting the control signal to the VDP and the acoustic DSP.

The VDP of the image control board 150 is an image ROM that stores material data necessary for image generation, a drawing engine that executes image drawing processing, and an output that outputs an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31. It has a circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

The acoustic DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to an acoustic ROM that stores various acoustic data related to music, audio, sound effects, and the like, and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP. The acoustic DSP reads acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and amplifies the sound signal obtained by this data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU. Then, the amplified sound signal is output to the audio output device 32.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by the start-up operation and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110.

In FIG. 23, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes the game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to the power being turned on. In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a is stored in the main RAM 110c in the ON / OFF of the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the back surface of the gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on, and in the power-off monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power failure. Based on the power failure occurrence information and the contents of the checksum that are backed up, the necessity of data recovery is decided, and if it is decided that recovery is not necessary, the main RAM 110c is cleared and it is decided that recovery is necessary. In that case, the data in the main RAM 110c is restored.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power cutoff monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not the power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred, and when the power-off occurs, the firing mechanism (touch sensor 3a, firing volume 3b, firing solenoid 4a, And the ball feed solenoid 4b) stops the launch of the game ball, clears the output port, stops the payout of the game ball by the payout device, creates and saves checksums in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and information on the occurrence of power failure. After performing a series of processes for setting the above, access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power failure.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a game random number value update process (S30). In the game random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random value and the special figure variation random value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process (S40). In the initial random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

After that, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop processing of steps S20 to S40. Further, in addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes timer interrupt processing every time a reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 executes the timer interrupt process every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

In FIG. 24, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that time in the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs a time control process (S110). The time control process is a process of updating the counter used for timing various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a subtracts the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c one by one.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a random number update process (S120). In the random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a updates each random number counter by +1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. ..

After the execution of step S120, the main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process (S130). In the initial random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a first winning opening detection switch 16a, a second winning opening detection switch 17a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, and a second starting opening detection switch 15a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. The details of the input control processing procedure will be described later.

After the execution of step S200, the main CPU 110a performs the special figure special electric control process (S300). In the special figure special electric control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special electric processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs special symbol memory determination processing (special figure special electric processing). Processing when data = 0), special symbol variation processing (processing when special symbol special electric processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (processing when special symbol special electric processing data = 2), jackpot game processing (special) One of the five processes of the figure special electric processing data = 3 processing) and the jackpot game end processing (processing when the special figure special electric processing data = 4) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

After the execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs the normal drawing control process (S400). In the normal symbol memory control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the normal symbol processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the normal symbol memory determination process (general diagram). Normal symbol processing data = 0 processing), normal symbol variation processing (processing when normal symbol processing data = 1), normal symbol stop processing (processing when normal symbol processing data = 2), And, one of the four processes of the auxiliary game process (process when the normal map and normal electric processing data = 3) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the Fuzu Fuden control process will be described later.

After executing step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning opening prize ball counter, the first starting opening winning ball counter, and the second starting opening winning ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. Is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout number designation command, the payout control board 130 controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the game ball.

After executing step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a data generation process (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a outputs external output data, starting port opening / closing solenoid data, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, and ordinary symbol display device data. Generate.

After executing step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process (S700). In the output control process, the main CPU 110a outputs signals of external output data, starting port opening / closing solenoid data, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, and second winning opening opening / closing solenoid data created in the data generation process of step S600. Perform port output processing. Further, in order to light each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data and the ordinary symbol created in the data generation process of S600 described above are used. Performs display device output processing that outputs display device data. Further, a command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 is also performed.

After executing step S700, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S800).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the input control process. In FIG. 25, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If there is no input of the detection signal, the process proceeds to the next step S220 as it is. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c to update.

After executing step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the large winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. If the detection signal is not input from either the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S230 as it is. When a detection signal is input from the first prize opening detection switch 16a or the second prize opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the prize ball counter for the prize opening in the main RAM 110c. The number of large winning opening balls (C) in the main RAM 110c is increased by +1 to update the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area.

After the execution of step S220, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process (S230). In the first start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is not input from the first start port detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S240 as it is. When the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4, and the first special symbol hold. Update the first special symbol hold number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, store the random number value in the special symbol hold storage area, pre-judgment the jackpot lottery and specify the start prize according to the judgment result A series of processes such as a set of commands and a set of commands for specifying the number of special symbol reservations according to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) are performed. The details of the procedure for inputting the first start port detection switch will be described later.

After the execution of step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process (S240). In the second start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal is not input from the second start port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S250 as it is. When a detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 15a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2) is less than 4, and the second special symbol hold. Update the second special symbol hold number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, store the random number value in the special symbol hold storage area, pre-judgment of the jackpot lottery and specify the start prize according to the judgment result A series of processing such as a set of commands and a set of commands for specifying the number of special symbol reservations according to the number of reservations (U2) in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is performed. The procedure of the second start port detection switch input process and the procedure of the first start port detection switch input process are the same except for the difference in the data writing destination.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 13a. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process as it is. When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Further, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter for counting the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4. Then, when the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is incremented by +1 and updated, the normal symbol random value is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random value is used as normal. Stores in the symbol hold storage area.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the first start port detection switch input process. In FIG. 26, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2 when the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes). When there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds a predetermined number (for example, 3) to the starting opening prize ball counter and updates it (S230-2). After that, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter for counting the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a ends the first start port detection switch input process this time. Further, when the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is incremented by +1 and updated (S230-4).

After the execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot random number value, and at the same time, the data is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol hold storage area of the special symbol hold storage area, and the number is the highest. A small storage unit is used as a data storage destination, and the acquired jackpot random number value is stored in the data storage destination storage unit (S230-5).

FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a special symbol reservation storage area. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the special symbol holding storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the fluctuation, the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the holding of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. It has a second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to hold. Each of the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area has a first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, a second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, and a third storage corresponding to the third hold. It has a unit and a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), each storage unit in the special symbol reservation storage unit can store a set of a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random value, a reach determination random value, and a special symbol variation random value. It has become.

After the execution of step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the special symbol random value and stores the acquired special symbol random value in the storage unit of the data storage destination in the first special symbol reservation storage area (S230-6). ..

After the execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure variation random value and the reach determination random value, and stores the acquired special figure variation random value and reach determination random value in the first special symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the storage unit of the storage destination of the data in (S230-7).

After executing step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs a pre-determination process (S230-8). In this pre-determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table of the main ROM 110b, and flags of the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S230-8 (when the start condition is satisfied). The presence or absence of the set and the jackpot random value, the special symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation random value stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7. Based on the combination with, the winning information of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time is determined.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for preliminarily determining the result of the jackpot lottery. In the pre-judgment table, the jackpot random value, the special symbol random value, the game state (time-saving game state or non-time-saving game state), the reach judgment random value, the special figure variation random value, the winning information, and the start winning designation command What the set refers to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and what is referred to when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied. It is memorized separately.

After the execution of step S230-8, the main CPU 110a generates a start prize designation command corresponding to the prize information determined in the pre-determination process of step S230-8, and sets this start prize designation command in the transmission data storage area for production. (S230-9). After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter, generates a special symbol hold number designation command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1), and specifies the special symbol hold number. The command is set in the transmission data storage area for production (S230-10).

The start prize designation command and the special symbol hold number designation command set in the transmission data storage area for effect are transmitted to the effect control board 120 in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol this time based on the description content of the start prize designation command, and designates the content of the determined effect. The command to be executed is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

Here, the procedure of the second start port detection switch input process (S240) is such that the reference destination of the hold number in steps S230-3 and S230-4 becomes the second special symbol hold number counter, and steps S230-5 to S230. The point where the storage destination of the random number value in -7 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, the point where the reference destination of the random number value in step S230-8 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10. Is the same as that of the first start port detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination is the second special symbol hold number counter.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure special electric control process. In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data (S301). In the following step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure If the special electric processing data = 1, the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and the special symbol special electric processing data = If it is 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol memory determination process. In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, determines that if the special symbol time counter is not 0, it is in the process of displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If so, it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not in progress. When the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol storage determination process this time. If the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter of the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter by -1 (S310-). 3). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a model that preferentially digests the hold of the change of the second special symbol over the hold of the change of the first special symbol. In these types of gaming machines, even if the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the preliminary determination is not performed during the time-saving gaming state.

When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter and makes the first special. It is determined whether the number of reserved symbols (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4).

When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol storage determination process this time.

When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 6). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a storage area shift process (S310-7). In this storage area shift process, the main CPU 110a uses the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the symbol obtained by subtracting the reserved number in steps S310-3 or S310-6. The following processing is performed as the processing target.

When the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-3, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored as 1 each. It shifts to the previous storage unit and writes the data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area to the 0th storage unit which is the determination storage area. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random value, special symbol random value, reach determination random value, special symbol fluctuation random value) stored in the 0th storage unit are deleted. Will be done.

Further, when the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a stores the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reservation storage area, respectively. The data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is written to the 0th storage unit by shifting to the storage unit immediately before the above. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random value, special symbol random value, reach determination random value, special symbol fluctuation random value) stored in the 0th storage unit are deleted. Will be done.

After executing step S310-7, the main CPU 110a generates a special symbol hold number designation command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2). , This special symbol hold number designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S310-8).

After executing step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition this time, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and determines the jackpot. Generate a symbol specification command for big hits corresponding to the type of, and set it in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is lost, a symbol specification command for loss is generated and set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

More specifically, in this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a has a lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition this time, as shown in the example of FIG. 31 (flow chart showing the details of the jackpot determination process). Is a big hit or a loss (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table of the main ROM 110b, and the presence / absence of a flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S311-1 and the 0th storage in step S310-7. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random value stored in the section.

FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the jackpot lottery determination table, the set of the jackpot random number value and the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery is referred to in the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state. It is stored separately from the ones referred to at the time.

Comparing the number of jackpot random numbers that become jackpots in the low-probability gaming state and the number of jackpot random numbers that become jackpots in the high-probability gaming state in this jackpot lottery judgment table, the jackpot random number values of jackpots in the low-probability gaming state are "7. , And "8", while the jackpot random number values of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state are 20 of "7" to "26". The random number range of the jackpot random number value is 0 to 598. Therefore, the jackpot winning probability in the low-probability gaming state is 2/599 (= 1 / 299.5), and the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is increased by 10 times to 20/599 (=). 1 / 29.9).

The main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2 when the determination result in step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), and when the determination result in step S311-1 is lost (S311-1: 1). No), the process proceeds to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and stops the fluctuation stop symbol based on the special symbol random value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number (“00” to “07”) corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation.

FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a big hit symbol determination table. In the jackpot symbol determination table, a set of a special symbol random value, a special symbol type (big hit type), a stop symbol data, and a symbol designation command is a starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. Is stored separately for reference when the condition is satisfied and for reference when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied.

The effect symbol designation command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed after being changed.

The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is used in the jackpot game end processing, when the jackpot symbol is determined in the special symbol stop processing, when the operation mode of the jackpot is determined in the jackpot game processing, and when the operation mode of the jackpot is determined in the jackpot game processing. It is referred to when determining the game state. Details will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designation command for a jackpot corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets this symbol designation command in the production transmission data storage area (S311-3).

Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state (at the time of the jackpot lottery) based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and obtains the game state information indicating the obtained game state. Stored in the game state buffer (S311-4). Specifically, when both the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are not set, the main CPU 110a sets the data of "00H" in the game state buffer as game state information. If the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is not set, the data of "01H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. If the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is set, the data of "02H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. When both the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are set, the data of "03H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a loss symbol determination process. In this lost symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the stop symbol data of the lost stop symbol with reference to the loss symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

FIG. 33B is a diagram showing a symbol determination table for loss. In the loss symbol determination table, the set of the special symbol type, the stop symbol data, and the symbol designation command is referred to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied. 2 The special symbol display device 21 is stored separately from the reference when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designation command for loss corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets this symbol designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect (S311-6).

Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the main ROM 110b, and the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the jackpot lottery in step S311-1 and the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S312 Presence / absence of flag set, number of pending updates (U2) or (U1) in step S310-3 or step S310-6, jackpot random value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, random value for reach determination , And the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is determined based on the combination of the random values for the fluctuation of the special figure.

There are two types of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one that is referred to when the first special symbol is changed and the other that is referred to when the second special symbol is changed. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to when the first special symbol is changed. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to when the second special symbol is changed.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the special symbol type (big hit type), game state (time-saving game state or non-time-saving game state), number of holdings, reach determination random value, special symbol variation random value, special The type of fluctuation pattern of the symbol, the fluctuation time, and the set of fluctuation start commands are stored. The variation start command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of variation pattern.

In the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is easy to select a variation pattern having a long variation time. For example, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34, the options of the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 1 (per 16R probability variation) are variation pattern 11, variation pattern 12, variation pattern 13, variation pattern 15, variation. There are seven types, pattern 16 and variation pattern 17.

The fluctuation pattern 11 develops into an SP reach effect without the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of pseudo-variations is 0), and the variation time is T1. The fluctuation pattern 12 develops into an SP reach effect through one pseudo variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T2 (T2> T1). The variation pattern 13 develops into an SP reach effect through two pseudo variations of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T3 (T3> T2).

The fluctuation pattern 14 develops into an SPSP reach effect without the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of pseudo-variations is 0), and the variation time is T4 (T4> T3). The fluctuation pattern 15 develops into an SPSP reach effect through one pseudo variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T5 (T5> T4). The variation pattern 16 develops into an SPSP reach effect through two pseudo variations of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T6 (T6> T5).

The fluctuation pattern 17 develops into a full rotation reach effect through three pseudo variations of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T7. Of these, the magnitude relationship of the six types of selectivity excluding the fluctuation pattern 17, which is the jackpot confirmation effect, is as follows: fluctuation pattern 11 <variation pattern 12 <variation pattern 13 <variation pattern 14 <variation pattern 15 <variation pattern 16. There is.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost, it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. For example, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34, the variation corresponding to the combination of the special symbol 0 (loss), the non-time saving game state, and the reach (the random value for reach determination is "70 to 99"). There are seven pattern options: variation pattern 9, variation pattern 1, variation pattern 2, variation pattern 3, variation pattern 4, variation pattern 5, and variation pattern 6.

The fluctuation pattern 9 is lost without developing after the normal reach effect, and the fluctuation time is T9 (T9 <T1).

The fluctuation pattern 1 develops into an SP reach effect without the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of pseudo-variations is 0), and the variation time is T1. The fluctuation pattern 2 develops into an SP reach effect through one pseudo variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T2. The fluctuation pattern 3 develops into an SP reach effect through two pseudo variations of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T3.

The fluctuation pattern 4 develops into an SPSP reach effect without the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of pseudo-variations is 0), and the variation time is T4. The fluctuation pattern 5 develops into an SPSP reach effect through one pseudo variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T5. The variation pattern 6 develops into an SPSP reach effect through two pseudo variations of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variation time is T6.

The magnitude relation of these seven types of selectivity is variation pattern 9 <variation pattern 1 <variation pattern 2 <variation pattern 3 <variation pattern 4 <variation pattern 5 <variation pattern 6.

Further, comparing the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol with the pre-judgment table (FIG. 28) shown above, in the pre-determination table, the number of pending changes of the first special symbol (U1) and the second special symbol It is possible to search the corresponding data in the table without referring to the number of pending fluctuations (U2). On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination table, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the number of holdings of fluctuations of the first special symbol (U1) and the number of holdings of fluctuations of the second special symbol (U2) are not referred to. As long as it is not possible to search the corresponding data in the table. Therefore, although the type of reach can be discriminated in the pre-judgment table, it is not possible to discriminate between "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation".

In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a generates a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312, and sets this fluctuation start command in the production transmission data storage area (S313).

Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence or absence of a flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and generates a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state. This game state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S314).

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol (S315). Specifically, the main CPU 110a puts the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the first special symbol display device 20 Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 (S317), and ends the special symbol storage determination process this time. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol variation process in step S302, and the special symbol variation process is performed.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation processing. In FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, determines that the special symbol variation time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and sets the special symbol time counter to 0. If not, it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S320-2. If it is determined that the special symbol variation time has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variation display data set in step S315, and sets the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 in the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device 20 or. 2 The stop symbol data for causing the special symbol display device 21 to stop and display is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

Next, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special symbol special electric processing data (S320-5), and ends the special symbol variation processing this time. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol stop process in step S302, and the special symbol stop process is performed.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 37, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the special symbol time counter is set. If it is not 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the current special symbol stop process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. In this time-saving game end determination process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area. If the time-saving game flag is not set in the time-saving game flag storage area, the process proceeds to the next step S330-3 as it is. When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the time saving number of times (J) in the storage area is updated by -1, and the updated time saving number of times (J) is 0. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the time saving number (J) is 0, the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared, and then the process proceeds to the next step S330-3. If the number of time reductions (J) is not "0", the process proceeds to the next step S330-3 with the time reduction game flag set in the time reduction game flag storage area.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. In this high-probability game end determination process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the process proceeds to the next step S330-4 as it is. High-probability game flag When the high-probability game flag is set in the storage area, the high-probability game count (X) in the high-probability game count (X) storage area is updated by -1, and the updated high probability is high. It is determined whether or not the number of games (X) is 0. As a result, when the number of high-probability games (X) is 0, the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared, and then the process proceeds to the next step S330-4. If the number of high-probability games (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to the next step S330-4 with the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence or absence of a flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and issues a game state designation command corresponding to the obtained game state. Generate and set this game state specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lost one (S330-5). When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is lost (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data (S330-6), and stops the special symbol this time. End the process. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol memory determination process in step S302, and the special symbol memory determination process is performed.

When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special symbol special electric processing data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the game state, the number of high-probability games (X), and the number of time reductions (J) at that time (S330-11). Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the high-probability game flag storage area and the high-probability game number (X) storage area. .. Further, when the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the time-saving game flag storage area and the time-saving number of times (J) storage area.

After executing step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game control table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the jackpot opening / closing control table for 16R and the jackpot for 8R are large. The winning opening opening / closing control table and the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R are determined as reference destinations.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a special game control table. FIG. 39A is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R. FIG. 39B is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R. FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R.

In the special game control table, the set of the stop symbol data, the opening time, the table number of the reference destination grand prize opening open / close control table, and the ending time is stored for each type of jackpot. Here, the table number of the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R is 01, the table number of the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R is 02, and the table number of the large winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R is 02. It is 03.

The opening / closing control table for the large winning opening for 16R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to 16th rounds per 16R, and the type of the large winning opening to be opened. The opening / closing control table for the large winning opening for 8R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to eighth rounds per 8R, and the type of the large winning opening to be opened. The opening / closing control table for the large winning opening for 2R stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to second rounds per 2R, and the type of the large winning opening to be opened.

The main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot, and uses this opening designation command as production transmission data. Set in the storage area (S330-13).

The main CPU 110a determines the start interval time according to the type of jackpot based on the big winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets this start interval time in the special symbol time counter (S330-14). ), End the special symbol stop processing this time. In the special figure special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the jackpot game process in step S302, and the jackpot game process is performed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 39, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, determines that the opening is in progress if the number of rounds (R) is 0, and determines that the number of rounds (R) is open. If is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not in progress. If the main CPU 110a is in the opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If the opening is not in progress (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop processing, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it determines that the start interval time has elapsed, and specially. If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-3. If it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the storage area by +1. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, the operation has not been performed even once, and the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area is 0. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after the update in this step S340-3 becomes 1.

After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this large winning opening opening / closing process, the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c is energized in order to open the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b. Set the energization data to be made. Further, the main CPU 110a obtains the opening time of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R) with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12. , Set this opening time in the special game timer counter.

After executing step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a round start command transmission determination process (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a generates a round start command according to the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area, and sets this round start command in the transmission data storage area for production. , Finish this jackpot game process.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. If the main CPU 110a determines that the ending is not in progress (S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening is closed (S340-7). Specifically, the main CPU 110a is large when the energization data (the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c) is not set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is determined that the winning opening is closed, and when the energization data is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the large winning opening is not closed. When the main CPU 110a is closing the large winning opening (S340-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-8. If the grand prize opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set in the special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to the large winning opening opening process in step S340-4, followed by the large winning opening opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determination process (S340). -5) is performed, and the jackpot game process of this time is completed. When it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process this time.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110a is opened when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area reaches the specified number (9) or the opening time has elapsed. It is determined that the end condition is satisfied. Further, in the main CPU 110a, the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area has not reached the specified number (9), and the opening time has not elapsed. In this case, it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-10. Further, when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b, so that the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid is used. The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and based on the current number of rounds (R), the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 Set the closing time to the special game timer counter. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed.

After executing step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has been completed (S340-11). Specifically, when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area reaches the specified number (9), the main CPU 110a plays one round game. Judge that it is finished. Further, the main CPU 110a ends one round game when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area does not reach the specified number (9). Judge that it is not. When the main CPU 110a determines that one round game has been completed (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round game has not been completed (S340-11: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs the round data initialization process. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a resets the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the storage area to 0.

After the execution of step S340-12, the main CPU 110a has the maximum number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area (specifically, the final of the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12). It is determined whether or not the number of rounds has been reached (S340-13).

When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has not reached the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340). -14), the jackpot game process this time is completed.

When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340-). 15).

After executing step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an ending designation command according to the type of jackpot, and generates an ending designation command according to the type of jackpot. This ending designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S340-16).

After executing step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines the end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of jackpot, and sets this end interval time in the special game timer counter (S340-17).

When the main CPU 110a determines that the ending is in progress after the execution of step S340-17 or in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the end interval time has elapsed (S340-). 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, determines that the end interval time has elapsed if the special game timer counter is 0, and sets the special game timer counter to 0. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current jackpot game process.

When the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data (S340-19), and ends the special symbol variation processing this time. In the special figure special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the jackpot game end process in step S302, and the jackpot game end process is performed.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game end process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

After executing step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process (S350-2). In the high-probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end-time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1, the high-probability at the end of the special game. Determine the necessity of setting the game flag.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a setting table at the end of the special game. In the special game end setting table, there are stop symbol data, data indicating the storage contents of the game state buffer, data indicating the necessity of the time-saving game state, data indicating the number of time-saving games, and data indicating the necessity of the high-probability state. And a set of data indicating the number of high-probability games is stored.

Specifically, in step S350-1, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If it is "03, 07" other than that, the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process (S350-3). In the high-probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games at the end of the special game ( X) The remaining number of fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

Specifically, in step S350-2, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times are set in the game count (X) storage area. If it is other than "03, 07", 0 times is set in the game count (X) storage area.

After the execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the time saving game flag at the end of the special game. Determine the need for a set of.

Specifically, in step S350-3, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 07", the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

After the execution of step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs the time reduction number of times setting process (S350-5). In the time reduction number setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the game number (J) at the end of the special game. The remaining number of fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

Specifically, in this step S350-4, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times are set in the game count (J) storage area. If it is "03, 07" other than that, 100 times is set in the game count (J) storage area.

After the execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and specifies the game state corresponding to the current game state. A command is generated, and this game state specification command is set in the production transmission data storage area (S350-6).

After the execution of step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game end processing. In the special symbol special electric control process after this, the process shifts to the special symbol memory determination process in step S302, and the special symbol memory determination process is performed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the Fuzu Fuden control process. In FIG. 43, the main CPU 110a loads the normal-figure general-purpose processing data (S401). In the following step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data, and if the normal symbol normal electric processing data = 0, the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the normal symbol storage determination processing, and the normal symbol general electric processing If the data = 1, the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation processing, if the data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stop processing, and if the data = 3, the processing is transferred to the auxiliary game processing. Move the process.

The outline of the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol change process, the normal symbol stop process, and the auxiliary game process is as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination process (process of normal symbol storage processing data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter is 1 or more. When the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is 0, the current normal symbol storage determination process is terminated. When the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is 1 or more, the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold count counter is updated by -1, and then the second to second in the normal symbol hold storage area. 4 The data in the storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written in the 0th storage unit. At this time, the normal symbol random value already written in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area is deleted. After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table of the main ROM 110b, and is based on the combination of the presence / absence of the flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area and the normal symbol random value in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. Then, the lottery result (win or lose) of the normal symbol lottery is determined, and the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds in the non-time saving game state, 0.2 seconds in the time saving game state) according to the lottery result is determined. decide.

FIG. 32B is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The ordinary symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. In the normal symbol lottery judgment table, the set of the normal symbol random value and the lottery result (hit or loss) of the normal symbol lottery is referred to in the non-time saving game state and in the time saving game state. It is stored separately.

Comparing the number of normal symbol judgment random values that are hit in the non-time saving game state and the number of normal symbol judgment random values that are hit in the time saving game state in this normal symbol lottery judgment table, the hits in the non-time saving game state are compared. While the normal symbol determination random value is only one (0), the normal symbol determination random value per hit in the time-saving game state is 65535 (0 to 65534). The random number range of the normal symbol determination random number value is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time-saving game state is 1/65536, and the winning probability in the time-saving game state is 65535/65536 = 1 / 1.00002.

After determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol time counter and starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22, and 1 in the normal symbol processing data. To set.

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing (processing when the normal symbol processing data = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol fluctuation If it is determined that the time has not passed, the normal symbol change processing this time is terminated. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the normal symbol lottery result, and the predetermined normal symbol stop time is set in the normal symbol time counter. Figure Set 2 to the general electric processing data.

In the normal symbol stop processing (processing when the normal symbol processing data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has become 0) and stops the normal symbol. If it is determined that the time has not passed, the normal symbol stop processing this time is terminated. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol. If the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is not a winning symbol, 0 is set in the normal symbol processing data, and if the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol, the normal symbol is set. Set 3 in the general electricity processing data.

In the auxiliary game processing (processing when the normal drawing processing data = 3), the main CPU 110a has the opening time of the second start port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time saving game state, 0.2 seconds in the non-time saving game state). 3.5 seconds) is determined, the second starting port 15 is opened during this opening time, then the second starting port 15 is closed, and 0 is set in the normal power processing data.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when a system reset occurs from the power supply board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 by the start-up operation.

In FIG. 44, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a reads the start program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes various flags in the sub RAM 120c in response to the power being turned on. After the initialization process is completed, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the effect random values 1 to 25 and the like. Further, in addition to the update processing of the random number value, the sub CPU 120a executes the timer interrupt processing every time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the effect control board 120. The sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 is shown in FIG. 45 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120, after the initialization process is completed and the game becomes possible. Execute a series of processes.

In FIG. 40, the sub CPU 120a saves the information in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area (S1400).

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates various counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are used. The content of the effect is determined, and a command indicating the content of the determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect input control process (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs processing according to the input signals of the effect buttons 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, 39e of the center key 39E. The details of the effect input control process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1800). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the command analysis process in step S1600 and the effect input control process in step S1700.

Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

46, 47, and 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the command analysis process (step S1600 of FIG. 40). In FIG. 46, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). When the sub CPU 120a has a command in the receive buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610. If there is no command in the receive buffer (S1601: No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a special symbol hold number designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is a special symbol hold number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611. If the command in the receive buffer is not a special symbol hold number designation command (S1610: No), the process proceeds to step 1620.

In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol hold number update process. In the special symbol hold number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol hold number designation command to determine the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed on the image display device 31, and determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed. Set the corresponding special figure display number specification command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol hold number update process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform an effect related to the appearance or erasure of the hold display image 37 in the image display device 31. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1620, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a start winning designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is the start prize designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621. If the command in the receive buffer is not the start prize designation command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a start winning designation command storage process. In the start prize designation command storage process, the sub CPU 120a selects and selects the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area corresponding to the start prize designation command in the receive buffer. The data is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the effect information storage area, and the storage unit having the smallest number is used as the data storage destination, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination. ..

FIG. 27C is a diagram showing an effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the effect information storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the fluctuation, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol, and the hold of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area is a first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, a second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, and a third storage unit corresponding to the third hold. And has a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 27 (d), each storage unit in the effect information storage area can store the start prize designation command and the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data.

In FIG. 46, after the execution of step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process (S1622). In the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a sets the change of the symbol corresponding to the start prize designation command as the final change for the start prize designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621, and sets the look-ahead hold display change effect. When determining the necessity of execution and executing the look-ahead hold display change effect, the scenario of the hold display change effect up to the final fluctuation is determined, and the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data indicating this scenario is used as the effect information. It is stored in the corresponding storage unit in the storage area. The details of the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process will be described later.

In step S1630, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a symbol designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is a symbol designation command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the receive buffer is not a symbol specification command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol determination process, and ends the command analysis process this time after executing the effect symbol determination process. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command to determine the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and substituting the determined stop symbol numbers. A stop symbol designation command for storing the stop symbol number in the effect symbol storage area in the RAM 120c and notifying the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 is generated, and the generated stop symbol designation command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol determination process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 determine the symbol combination at the time of stopping the fluctuation in the fluctuation.

In step S1640, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a fluctuation start command. When the command in the receive buffer is the fluctuation start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641. If the command in the receive buffer is not a fluctuation start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670 (FIG. 48).

In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs the storage area shift process. In the storage area shift process, when the sub CPU 120a stores data in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a stores the second to fourth effects information storage areas. The data in the unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second effect information storage area is written in the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the data (starting prize designation command, look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point is deleted. When no data is stored in the second effect information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, the first effect information storage area is the first. The data in the 2nd to 4th storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the 1st storage unit of the 1st effect information storage area is written in the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the data previously stored in the 0th storage unit is erased.

Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643 when the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data is stored (S1642: Yes). If the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data is not stored (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1644.

In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead effect control process. In the look-ahead effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the hold display image 37 in the change, and holds the display in the change. When changing the display mode of the image 37, an effect pattern specification command instructing the change of the display mode of the hold display image 37 is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the look-ahead effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designation command instructing the change of the display mode of the hold display image 37, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 are set to the execution time (time t _{HH in} FIG. 22) of the look-ahead hold display change effect. , The pre-reading hold display change effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1645, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. The variation effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a symbol variation effect pattern, which is a flow of effects related to the behavior of the effect symbol 36 and the first movable accessories 330a, 330b in the variation. In the variation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 1 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table of the sub ROM 120b, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 1, and determines the symbol variation effect pattern. Information is stored in the symbol variation effect pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table. In the variation effect pattern determination table, a set of an effect random number value 1, a symbol variation effect pattern, and an effect pattern designation command is stored for each command corresponding to the variation start command. Some of the plurality of symbol variation effect patterns corresponding to each variation start command include and some do not include the re-lottery effect. In addition, some include the second accessory operation effect and the first accessory operation effect, while others do not.

For example, as an option of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T1, SP reach effect, pseudo variation 0 times) with MODE data of "E6H" and DATA data of "11H", There are a symbol variation effect pattern 11, a symbol variation effect pattern 12, a symbol variation effect pattern 13, a symbol variation effect pattern 14, a symbol variation effect pattern 15, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 11 is normal reach effect → SP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability variation). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 12 is as follows: normal reach effect → second accessory operation effect (no accessory tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability variation). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 13 is as follows: normal reach effect → 2nd character operation effect (without tilting the character) → SP reach effect → 1st character operation effect (with falling character) → symbol stop (16R probability change hit) ). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 14 is as follows: normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no character tilt) → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect (16R probability change hit notification) → symbol stop (16R probability change hit). ing. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 15 is normal reach effect → second character operation effect (with character tilt) → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect (16R probability change hit notification) → symbol stop (16R probability change hit) ing.

In addition, as a choice of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T2, SP reach effect, pseudo variation 1 time) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "12H", There are a symbol variation effect pattern 21, a symbol variation effect pattern 22, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 21 is pseudo continuous effect (once) → normal reach effect → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability variation). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 22 is pseudo continuous effect (once) → normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no character tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (16R probability variation). ..

In addition, the option of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T3, SP reach effect, pseudo variation 2 times) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "13H" is available. There are a symbol variation effect pattern 31, a symbol variation effect pattern 32, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 31 is pseudo continuous effect (twice) → normal reach effect → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability variation). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 32 is pseudo continuous effect (twice) → normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no character tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (16R probability variation). ..

In addition, as a choice of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time T4, SPSP reach effect, pseudo variation 0 times) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "14H", There are a symbol variation effect pattern 41, a symbol variation effect pattern 42, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 41 is as follows: normal reach effect → SPSP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability variation). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 42 is as follows: normal reach effect → second accessory operation effect (with accessory tilt) → SPSP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R probability variation).

In addition, the symbol variation effect pattern options corresponding to the fluctuation start command (loss, fluctuation time T1, SP reach effect, pseudo variation 0 times) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "01H" are symbol variation. There are an effect pattern 01, a symbol variation effect pattern 02, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 01 is as follows: normal reach effect → SP reach effect → symbol stop (loss). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 02 is as follows: normal reach effect → second accessory operation effect (no accessory tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (loss).

The command set in the transmission buffer in the variation effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a series of effects according to the symbol variation effect pattern of the command from the start to the end of the variation time T of the fluctuations on the image display device 31 and the sound. The output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the command.

In step S1645 of FIG. 46, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the first accessory operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes the first accessory operation effect (S1645: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1646. If the first accessory operation effect is not included (S1645: No), the process proceeds to step S1649.

_{In step S1646, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t AY1 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception valid period of the first accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and resets this time. The value divided by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the clock pulse, is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the first accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. _{Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t AY2 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception valid period of the first accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and this time is set to 2 milliseconds. The divided value is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the first accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter is set to the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 10). It becomes 0 at t _AY2).

In step S1647, the sub CPU 120a sets the first operation effect standby flag in the operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The first operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the first accessory operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1648, the sub CPU 120a performs the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the first character operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the first character operation specific notice effect (FIG. 10 (c)) needs to be executed, and executes the first character operation specific notice effect. In this case, an effect pattern specification command for instructing the execution of the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the first accessory operation specific notice effect in accordance with _{the execution time of the first accessory operation specific notice effect (time t'AY1 in FIG. 10).} The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the command.

In step S1649 of FIG. 47, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the second accessory operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a includes the second accessory operation effect (S1649: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650. If the second accessory operation effect is not included (S1646: No), the process proceeds to step S1653.

_{In step S1650, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t SY1 in} FIG. 11) of the operation reception valid period of the second accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and sets this time to 2 mm. The value divided by seconds is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the second accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. _{Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t SY2 in} FIG. 11) of the operation reception valid period of the second accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and this time is set to 2 milliseconds. The divided value is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the second accessory operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{SY1 in} FIG. 11), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter is set to the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 11). It becomes 0 at t _SY2).

In step S1651, the sub CPU 120a sets the second operation effect standby flag in the operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The second operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the second accessory operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1652, the sub CPU 120a performs the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the second character operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the second character operation specific notice effect (FIG. 11 (c)) needs to be executed, and executes the second character operation specific notice effect. In this case, an effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the second accessory operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the second accessory operation specific notice effect in accordance with _{the execution time of the second accessory operation specific notice effect (time t'SY1 in FIG. 11).} The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the command.

In step S1653, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect selection process. In the step-up effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up effect (FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b)) needs to be executed based on the fluctuation start command in the receive buffer, and the step-up effect is selected. When executing, determine the scenario of the step-up effect up to the final stage, generate the effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the effect according to this scenario, and put the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. set. Details of the step-up effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the step-up effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the execution time of one or a plurality of step effects in the step-up effect (time t _SUP1 , t _SUP2 , t _SUP3 , t _SUP4 , t _{SPS in FIG. 13).} ), Each step effect of the step-up effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect selection process. In the dialogue operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dialogue operation effect (FIGS. 15A and 15B) needs to be executed based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, and determines the necessity of executing the dialogue operation effect. Is executed, an effect pattern specification command for instructing the execution of the dialogue operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the dialogue operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialogue operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the dialogue operation effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect in accordance with _{the execution time of the dialogue operation effect (time t SR0 in FIG. 15).} The drive devices 33a and 33b for driving and the lighting device 34 for effect are executed. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the dialogue operation effect according to the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 35.

In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the dialogue operation effect is to be executed in the determination of the necessity of executing the dialogue operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a decides to execute the dialogue operation effect (S1655: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1656. If it is decided not to execute the dialogue operation effect (S1655: No), the process proceeds to step S1657.

In step S1656, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect (FIG. 15 (c)) needs to be executed, and when the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed, the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed. Generates an effect pattern specification command that instructs the execution of, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. The details of the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect on the image display device 31 and the voice in accordance with _{the execution time of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect (time t'SR1 in FIG. 15).} The output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

In step S1657, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation effect selection process. In the roulette operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the roulette operation effect (FIGS. 16A and 16B) needs to be executed based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, and determines whether or not the roulette operation effect (FIGS. 16A and 16B) needs to be executed. Is executed, an effect pattern specification command for instructing the execution of the roulette operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the roulette operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the roulette operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the roulette operation effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect in accordance with _{the execution time of the roulette operation effect (time t RL0 in FIG. 16).} The drive devices 33a and 33b for driving and the lighting device 34 for effect are executed. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the roulette operation effect according to the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 35.

In step S1658, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the roulette operation effect is to be executed in the determination of the necessity of executing the roulette operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a decides to execute the roulette operation effect (S1658: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1659. If it is decided not to execute the roulette operation effect (S1658: No), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1659, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the roulette operation specific advance notice effect (FIG. 16 (c)) needs to be executed, and when the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is executed, the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is executed. Generates an effect pattern specification command that instructs the execution of, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. Details of the roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the roulette operation specific notice effect on the image display device 31 and the sound in accordance with _{the execution time of the roulette operation specific notice effect (time t'RL1 in FIG. 16).} The output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

In step S1660, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation effect selection process. In the gauge operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation effect (FIGS. 17 (a), 17 (b), 17 (c)) based on the fluctuation start command in the receive buffer. When the judgment is made and the gauge operation effect is executed, an effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the gauge operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the gauge operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the gauge operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 set the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a in accordance with _{the execution time of the gauge operation effect (time t CG0 in FIG. 17).} , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 start executing the gauge operation effect. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the gauge operation effect according to the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 35.

In step S1661, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the gauge operation effect is to be executed in the determination of the necessity of executing the gauge operation effect. When the sub CPU 120a decides to execute the gauge operation effect (S1661: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1662. If it is decided not to execute the gauge operation effect (S1661: No), the process proceeds to step S1663.

In step S1662, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process. In the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the gauge operation specific advance notice effect (FIG. 17 (d)) needs to be executed, and when the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is executed, the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is executed. Generates an effect pattern specification command that instructs the execution of, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. The details of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the gauge operation specific notice effect on the image display device 31 and the sound in accordance with _{the execution time of the gauge operation specific notice effect (time t'GG3 in FIG. 17).} The output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

In step S1660, the sub CPU 120a performs a timing operation effect selection process. In the timing operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect (FIGS. 18 (a), 18 (b), 18 (c)) needs to be executed based on the fluctuation start command in the receive buffer. When the judgment is made and the timing operation effect is executed, an effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the timing operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the timing operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the timing operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the timing operation effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect in accordance with _{the execution time of the timing operation effect (time t TM0 in FIG. 18).} The drive devices 33a and 33b for driving and the lighting device 34 for effect are executed. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the timing operation effect according to the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 35.

In step S1664, the sub CPU 120a performs the reach back button operation effect selection process. In the reach back button operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19 (a)) needs to be executed based on the fluctuation start command in the receive buffer, and determines whether or not the reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19 (a)) needs to be executed. Is executed, the effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the reach back button operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the reach back button operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the reach back button operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the back of the reach, provided that the back button operation is successful in accordance with _{the reach establishment timing (timing t NR in FIG. 19) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation.} The button operation effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1665, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up back button operation effect selection process. In the step-up back button operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect (FIG. 20A) needs to be executed based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, and the step-up back button operation effect is selected. When executing the button operation effect, a step-up back button operation effect is generated to instruct the execution of the effect pattern specification command, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the step-up back button operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the step-up back button operation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receives this command, the step-up back button operation determination timing fluctuation time of the fluctuation T (time _t UR1 in FIG _{20, t UR2, t UR3,} t UR4) On condition that the combined back button operation is successful, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute the step-up back button operation effect.

In step S1670, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a variable stop command. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671 when the command in the receive buffer is a fluctuation stop command (S1670: Yes). If the command in the receive buffer is not a variable stop command (S1670: No), the process proceeds to step S1680.

In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol stop processing. In the effect symbol stop process, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designation command for stopping the effect symbol 36, and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer.

The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol stop processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform an effect related to the stop of the effect symbol 36 on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. To execute.

In step S1680, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is a game state designation command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681. If the command in the receive buffer is not a game state specification command (S1680: No), the process proceeds to step S1690.

In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs the game state setting process. In the game state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the game state designation command in the reception buffer, obtains the current game state, and stores the game state information indicating the obtained game state in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. ..

In step S1690, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is an opening designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is the opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691. If the command in the receive buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the process proceeds to step S1692.

In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game effect selection process. In the special game effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines the opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores the determined opening effect pattern information in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, when the opening designation command is per 8R probability variation or 8R normal per, the sub CPU 120a decides to execute the promotion effect in the fourth round, and stores the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. The promotion effect execution data indicating the content of the promotion effect is stored. Details of the special game effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to execute the opening effect of the special game. ..

In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is a round start command. When the command in the receive buffer is the round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693. If the command in the receive buffer is not a round start command (S1692: No), the process proceeds to step S1694.

In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs a round effect control process. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the receive buffer and determines whether or not this round is the execution round of the promotion effect (4th round per 8R probability variation or 8R normal). judge. Based on this determination result, the sub CPU 120a determines the effect pattern of the current round, stores the determined effect pattern information in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates an effect pattern designation command for this effect pattern. , Set the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. The details of the round effect control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to execute the round effect of the special game. ..

In step S16934, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the receive buffer is an ending designation command. When the command in the receive buffer is the ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the receive buffer is not the ending specification command (S1694: No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game end effect control process. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer, determines the ending effect pattern, and stores the determined effect pattern information in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command for the determined effect pattern, and sets this effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. Further, the sub CPU 120a clears any flags set during the special game.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to execute the ending effect of the special game. ..

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the details of the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process (step S1622 of FIG. 46). In FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a sets the hold corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area that stores the start prize designation command in the start prize designation command storage process as the look-ahead determination target hold, and the variation of this look-ahead determination target hold develops. It is determined whether or not the variation has an effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) (S1622-1). When the sub CPU 120a is a variation having a development effect (S1622-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1622-2. If it is not a variation having a development effect (S1622-1: No), the pre-reading hold display change effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a variation having a development effect in the hold in which the change order is earlier than the look-ahead determination target hold. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3 when there is no variation having a development effect (S1622-2: No). When there is a change having a development effect (S1622-2: Yes), the pre-reading hold display change effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination process. In the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 2 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and is based on the combination of the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead determination target hold and the effect random value value 2. , Determines the necessity of executing the look-ahead hold display change effect.

FIG. 51 (a) is a diagram showing a look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead hold display change effect execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity (“execute” and “do not execute”) of the effect random value 2 and execution is referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit. It is memorized separately for what is referred to when it is lost. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random value values 2 are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead hold display change effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effects. The effect random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the look-ahead hold display change effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 45 (0 to 44) effect random values 2 are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead hold display change effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random values 2 are associated with each other. Is associated with data indicating that the look-ahead hold display change effect is not executed.

In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is "execute" (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1622-4: No), the pre-reading hold display change effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a look-ahead hold display change final stage determination process. In the look-ahead hold display change final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 3 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage hold display mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and is based on the combination of the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead judgment target hold and the effect random value value 3. The display mode of the hold display image 37 at the final stage in the look-ahead hold display change effect is determined.

FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram showing a final stage hold display mode determination table. In the final stage hold display mode determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random value 3 and the final stage hold display mode (“blue”, “green”, and “red”) is displayed when the pre-judgment result is a big hit. It is memorized separately for what is referred to in and what is referred to when it is lost. Specifically, for the jackpot, 10 (0 to 9) production random values 3 are associated with the data indicating the hold display mode of "blue", and 30 (10 to 39) productions are used. The random number value 3 is associated with the data indicating the “green” hold display mode, and 60 (40 to 99) production random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating the “red” hold display mode. There is. Regarding the loss, 60 (0 to 59) production random values 3 are associated with the data indicating the hold display mode of "blue", and 30 (60 to 89) production random values 3 are " It is associated with the data indicating the "green" hold display mode, and 10 (90 to 99) effect random values 3 are associated with the data indicating the "red" hold display mode.

In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination process. In the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 4 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and indicates the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead judgment target hold, the hold display mode at the final stage, the number of holds, and the number of holds. Based on the combination of the effect random number values 4, the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario is determined.

There are two types of look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table, one that is referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit and the other that is referred to when the pre-judgment result is lost. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a big hit. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is lost.

In the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table, each set of the effect random value 4 and the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data corresponds to the combination of the hold display mode and the number of holds at the final stage of the look-ahead hold display change effect. It is remembered in. In the jackpot look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table (Fig. 52) and the loss look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table (Fig. 53), the effect of the hold display change effect called "falling down" is directed to HR39 and HR49. Whether or not the random number value 4 is assigned is different.

More specifically, in this table, there is a hold display change effect scenario HB11 as an option corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 1. The hold display change effect scenario HB11 is a scenario in which the hold display image 37 is turned blue in the final change. The hold display change effect scenario HB11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 4. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 2 include hold display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22. The hold display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22 are scenarios in which the times when the hold display image 37 turns blue are different. The hold display change effect scenario HB21 is associated with 70 (0 to 69) effect random values 4, and the hold display change effect scenario HB22 is associated with 30 (70 to 99) effect random values 4. ing.

Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 3 include hold display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33. The hold display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33 are scenarios in which the times when the hold display image 37 turns blue are different. 20 to 50 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33, respectively. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 4 include hold display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44. The hold display change effect scenario HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44 are scenarios in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns blue is different. 10 to 40 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44, respectively.

An option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of hold 1 is the hold display change effect scenario HG11. The hold display change effect scenario HG11 is a scenario in which the hold display image 37 is turned green at the final change. The hold display change effect scenario HG11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 4. Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holds 2 include hold display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22. The hold display change effect scenario HG21 and HG22 are scenarios in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns green and the presence or absence of the change to blue before reaching the time are different. The hold display change effect scenario HG21 is associated with 70 (0 to 69) effect random values 4, and the hold display change effect scenario HG22 is associated with 30 (70 to 99) effect random values 4. ing.

Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holds 3 include hold display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38. The hold display change effect scenario HG31 to HG38 is a scenario in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns green and the presence or absence of the change to blue before reaching the time are different. In the hold display change effect scenario HG31 to HG38, 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with each other. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holds 4 include the hold display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48. The hold display change effect scenario HG41 to HG48 is a scenario in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching the time are different. In the hold display change effect scenario HG41 to HG48, 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with each other.

An option corresponding to the combination of red and the number of hold 1 is the hold display change effect scenario HR11. The hold display change effect scenario HR11 is a scenario in which the hold display image 37 is turned red at the final change. The hold display change effect scenario HR11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 4. Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holds 2 include hold display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24. The hold display change effect scenario HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24 are scenarios in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns red and the presence or absence of change to blue and green before reaching the time are different. 10 to 40 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24, respectively.

Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holds 3 include hold display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR39. The hold display change effect scenario HR31 to HR39 is a scenario in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns red and the presence or absence of change to blue and green before reaching the time are different. Here, the hold display change effect scenario HR31 to HR38 is a “start-up” scenario in which the later change changes to a more reliable hold display mode than the previous change, such as blue → green → red. On the other hand, the hold display change effect scenario HR39 is a “fall-down” scenario in which the later change changes to a hold display mode with lower reliability than the previous change, such as green → red → green. In the jackpot table (FIG. 52), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenario HR31 to HR38, and one (99) effect is associated with the hold display change effect scenario HR39. Random value 4 is associated with it. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 53), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38. Further, in the loss table, no effect random value 4 is associated with the hold display change effect scenario HR39.

Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holds 4 include hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49. The hold display change effect scenario HR41 to HR49 is a scenario in which the time when the hold display image 37 turns red and the presence or absence of change to blue and green before reaching the time are different. Of the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49, the hold display change effect scenario HR41 to 48 is a “rise” scenario, and the hold display change effect scenario HR49 is a “fall” scenario. In the jackpot table (FIG. 52), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenario HR41 to HR48, and one (99) effect is associated with the hold display change effect scenario HR49. Random value 4 is associated with it. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 53), 5 to 20 effect random values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48. Further, in the loss table, no effect random value 4 is associated with the hold display change effect scenario HR49.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1, for the combination of red and the number of holds 3 and the combination of red and the number of holds 4, the “falling down” hold display change effect scenarios HR39 and HR49 can be selected only from the jackpot table. ing. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1, the pre-reading hold display change effect of "falling down" is a final variation jackpot confirmation effect (an effect of notifying that the final variation will be a jackpot before the symbol of the final variation is stopped).

In step S1622-7 of FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determined in the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination process in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

Here, in the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process, when there is a development effect in the look-ahead determination target hold and there is no development effect in the previous hold in the order of change (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No). , Look-ahead hold display change effect execution judgment processing is performed. Due to such a flow of processing, when the effect pre-reading hold display change effect is executed, the effect control board 120 executes the development effect as the effect during the change display of the final variation of the pre-reading hold display change effect, and the pre-reading hold display change effect. It is regulated that the development effect is executed as the effect during the change display before the final change of the display change effect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect symbol determination process (step S1631 of FIG. 46). In FIG. 54, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the fluctuation stops at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1: Yes). When the fluctuation stops at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631-2. If the fluctuation does not stop at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1631-3.

In step S1631-2, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the winning jackpot type, and in the selected symbol combination. The four stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

In step S1631-3, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the loss, and the left symbol 36L in the selected symbol combination, The four stop symbol numbers of the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

In step S1631-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the four determined stop symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1631-5, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop symbol designation command for notifying the four determined stop symbol numbers, and sets the generated stop symbol designation command in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the details of the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1648 of FIG. 46). In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a performs the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1648-1). In the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and is based on the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random value value 5. It is determined whether or not the first accessory operation specific notice effect is to be executed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the first accessory operation specific notice effect execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) of the effect random value 5 is displayed when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately for what is referred to and what is referred to when it is lost. Specifically, for the jackpot, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) random values for production 5 execute the first character operation specific advance notice effect, and 80 (20 to 99) effects for production. The random number value 5 is associated with the data indicating that the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. The loss is associated with data indicating that 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 5 do not execute the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect. Regarding the loss, no effect random number value 5 is associated with the data indicating that the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 can perform the first accessory operation effect with the accessory drop, which is an effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot. When it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect and the first accessory operation effect without falling of an accessory, which is an effect that is easily selected when the jackpot judgment result is not a big hit, is executed, the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect is executed. To regulate the execution of.

In step S1648-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1648-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1648-2: No), the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1648-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command instructing the execution of the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. The operation specific notice effect selection process ends.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the details of the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1652 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 57, the sub CPU 120a performs the second accessory operation specific notice effect execution determination process (S1652-1). In the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value value 6 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the fluctuation. It is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect based on the presence or absence of development to and the combination of the effect random value value 6.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a second accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a set of data indicating the necessity (“execute” and “do not execute”) of the effect random value 6 and execution is the jackpot judgment result and the presence / absence of development. It is stored separately for each combination and corresponding one. Specifically, for a combination in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and there is development, 75 (0 to 74) production random number values 6 are data indicating that the second character operation specific notice effect is executed. Twenty-five (75 to 99) effect random value values 6 are associated with data indicating that the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For the combination in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and there is no development, 100 (0 to 99) effect random value values 6 are associated with data indicating that the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For this combination, no effect random number value 6 is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is executed.

For combinations where the jackpot judgment result is lost and there is development, 80 (0 to 79) production random number values 6 indicate that the second character operation specific notice effect is executed, and 20 (80 to 99). ) Is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For the combination in which the jackpot determination result is lost and there is no development, 100 (0 to 99) effect random value values 6 are associated with data indicating that the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For this combination, no effect random number value 6 is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect is executed.

With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the second accessory operation when the second accessory operation effect with the accessory tilt, which is an effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, is executed. When it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect and execute a second accessory operation effect without tilting the accessory, which is an effect that is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit, the second bonus operation specific advance notice effect is executed. Regulate the execution of.

In step S1652-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1652-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1652-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1652-2: No), the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1652-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command instructing the execution of the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. The operation specific notice effect selection process ends.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the details of the step-up effect selection process (step S1653 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 59, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect execution determination process (S1653-1). In the step-up effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 7 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 7, the step-up effect is produced. Judge the necessity of execution of.

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a step-up effect execution determination table. In the step-up effect execution judgment table, the set of the effect random value 7 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one to be referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately for what is referred to at the time. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 7 are associated with data indicating that the step-up effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effects are used. The random number value 7 is associated with data indicating that the step-up effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 45 (0 to 44) effect random values 7 are associated with data indicating that the step-up effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random values 7 are stepped. It is associated with data indicating that the up effect is not executed.

In step S1653-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the step-up effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1653-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1653-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1653-2: No), the step-up effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1653-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the step-up effect final stage determination process. In the step-up effect final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 8 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect final stage determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and steps up based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 8. Determine the final stage of the production.

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a step-up effect final stage determination table. In the step-up effect final stage determination table, a set of the effect random value 8 and the data indicating the final stage is stored separately for those to be referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot and those to be referred to when the jackpot is lost. There is. Specifically, for jackpots, data indicating that 3 (0 to 2) production random values 8 indicate "normal stage 1 (blue)" and 5 (3 to 7) production random values 8 are Data indicating "normal stage 2 (blue)", data indicating that 7 (8 to 14) random values for production 8 indicate "normal stage 2 (green)", and 11 (15 to 25) production Data in which the random number value 8 indicates "normal stage 3 (blue)", data in which 12 (26 to 37) production random values 8 indicate "normal stage 3 (green)", and 13 data (38 to 51). ), The production random value 8 indicates "normal stage 3 (red)", and 14 (52 to 63) production random values 8 indicate "normal stage 4 (blue)", and 16 pieces. Data in which the production random value 8 of (64 to 80) indicates "normal stage 4 (green)" and data in which 18 (81 to 98) production random values 8 indicate "normal stage 4 (red)". And one (99) effect random value 8 is associated with the data indicating the "special stage", respectively.

Regarding the loss, 18 (0 to 17) production random values 8 indicate "normal stage 1 (blue)", and 16 (18 to 33) production random values 8 are "normal stage 2 (normal stage 2). The data indicating "blue)", the data indicating that 14 (34 to 47) production random values 8 are "normal stage 2 (green)", and the 13 (48 to 60) production random values 8 are " Data indicating "normal stage 3 (blue)", data indicating that 12 (61 to 72) production random values 8 are "normal stage 3 (green)", and 11 (73 to 83) production disturbances. Numerical value 8 indicates "normal stage 3 (red)", 7 (84 to 90) production random number values 8 indicate "normal stage 4 (blue)", and 5 (91 to 95). The production random value 8 is associated with the data indicating "normal stage 4 (green)" and the four (96 to 99) production random values 8 are associated with the data indicating "normal stage 4 (red)". Has been done. Further, regarding the loss, none of the effect random values 8 is associated with the data indicating the "special stage".

In step S1653-4, the sub CPU 120a performs the step-up effect scenario determination process. In the step-up effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 9 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect scenario determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the step-up effect scenario based on the combination of the final stage determined in the previous step and the effect random number value 9.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a step-up effect scenario determination table. In the step-up effect scenario determination table, a set of the effect random number value 9 and the step-up effect scenario data is stored for each item corresponding to the final stage of the step-up effect.

More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the normal stage 1 (blue) is the step-up effect scenario GS11. The step-up effect scenario GS11 is a scenario in which only the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) is performed. The step-up effect scenario GS11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 9.

As an option corresponding to the normal stage 2 (blue), there is a step-up effect scenario GS21. The step-up effect scenario GS21 is a scenario that develops from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) to the step effect of the normal stage 2 (blue). The step-up effect scenario GS21 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 9.

As an option corresponding to the normal stage 2 (green), there is a step-up effect scenario GS22. The step-up effect scenario GS22 is a scenario that develops from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) to the step effect of the normal stage 2 (green). The step-up effect scenario GS22 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 9.

Options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (blue) include step-up effect scenarios GS31 and GS32. The step-up effect scenario GS31 is a scenario that develops from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) → the step effect of the normal stage 2 (blue) → the step effect of the normal stage 3 (blue). The step-up effect scenario GS32 is a scenario that develops from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) → the step skipping → the step effect of the normal stage 3 (blue). The step-up effect scenario GS31 is associated with 90 (0 to 89) effect random values 9, and the step-up effect scenario GS32 is associated with 10 (90 to 99) effect random values 9. ..

Options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (green) include step-up production scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35. The step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1 and 2 before reaching the normal stage 3 (green) and the presence or absence of skipping the step effect in the middle are different. In the step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35, 10 to 45 effect random values 9 are associated with each other.

Options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (red) include step-up production scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39. The step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1 and 2 before reaching the normal stage 3 (red) and the presence or absence of skipping the step effect in the middle are different. In the step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39, 10 to 30 effect random values 9 are associated with each other.

Options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (blue) include step-up production scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43. The step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43 are scenarios in which the presence or absence of skipping the step effect in the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (blue) is different. The step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43 are associated with 5 to 90 effect random values 9, respectively.

Options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (green) include step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60. The step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1, 2 and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (green) and the presence or absence of skipping the step effect in the middle are different. In the step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60, 5 to 20 effect random values 9 are associated with each other.

The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (red) include the step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70. The step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1, 2 and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (red) and the presence or absence of skipping the step effect in the middle are different. In the step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70, 5 to 20 effect random values 9 are associated with each other.

Options corresponding to the special stage include step-up production scenarios GS81 to GS90. The step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1, 2, 3, and 4 before reaching the special stage and the presence or absence of skipping the step effect in the middle are different. In the step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90, 5 to 20 effect random values 9 are associated with each other.

In step S1653-5 of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the step-up effect scenario determined in the step-up effect scenario determination process in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation effect selection process (step S1654 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect execution determination process (S1654-1). In the dialogue operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 10 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random value value 10, the dialogue operation effect Judge the necessity of execution of.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a dialogue operation effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation effect execution judgment table, the set of the effect random value 10 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) are different from those referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately for what is referred to at the time. Specifically, for the jackpot, 45 (0 to 44) effect random values 10 are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effects are used. The random number value 10 is associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 10 are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random values 10 are dialogues. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

In step S1654-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the dialogue operation effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1654-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1654-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1654-2: No), the present dialogue operation effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1654-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the dialogue operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a mode of notifying the operation result of progress triggered by the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 11 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random value value 11, the dialogue effect is produced. Determine the evolution pattern of.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing a dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table. In the dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number value 11 and the progress pattern is stored separately for reference when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and reference when the jackpot is lost.

Specifically, the options corresponding to the jackpot in this table include progress patterns SP11 to SR15 (character A is the character who speaks the dialogue) and SR21 to SR25 (character B is the character who speaks the dialogue). Progress pattern SR31-SR35 (character C is the character who speaks the lines), progress pattern SR41-SR45 (character D is the character who speaks the lines), progress pattern SR50 (premium character appears) ).

Regarding the jackpot, five effect random values 11 are associated with the progress patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35. The progress patterns SR 41 to 45 are associated with 4 to 5 effect random values 11. One effect random number value 11 is associated with the progress pattern SR50.

Regarding the loss, 4 to 5 effect random values 11 are associated with the progress patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35. Seven effect random values 11 are associated with the progress patterns SR41 to SR45. The progress pattern SR50 is not associated with any effect random value 11.

Here, in this table, the difference between the selection rate in the case of a big hit and the selection rate in the case of a loss in the progress patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35 is a maximum of 1%, whereas the progress pattern SR41 to The difference between the selection rate in the case of a big hit and the selection rate in the case of a loss in SR45 is a maximum of 3%. Progression patterns SR11-SR15 (character A speaks lines), SR21-SR25 (character B speaks lines), SR31-SR35 (character C speaks lines) and progress patterns SR41-SR45 Comparing with (character D speaks a line), it is difficult to select the progress patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35 when the jackpot judgment result is not a jackpot, and the progress patterns SR41 to SR45. Is easy to be selected when the jackpot judgment result is not a jackpot.

_{In step S1654-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t SR1 in} FIG. 15) of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and sets this time to 2 milliseconds. The value divided by is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the dialogue operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. _{Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t SR2 in} FIG. 15) of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter is set to the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 15). It becomes 0 at t _SR2).

In step S1654-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area. The dialogue operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the dialogue operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1654-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the present dialogue operation effect selection process.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the details of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1656 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 64, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1656-1). In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 12 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random value value 12, the dialogue Judge the necessity of executing the operation specific notice effect.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a set of a random number value 12 for effect and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is displayed in the progress pattern SR50 (premium character) in the progress mode determination process. It is stored separately for what is referred to when (appears) is determined and what is referred to when other things are determined. Specifically, for the progress pattern SR50, data indicating that one (0) effect random value 12 executes the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect, and 99 (2 to 99) effect random values 12 Is associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For those other than the progress pattern SR50, 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 12 are associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For those other than the progress pattern SR50, no effect random number value 12 is associated with the data indicating that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 executes the dialogue operation effect during the variable display of the symbol, the effect control board 120 executes the specific advance notice effect before executing the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect. To regulate.

In step S1656-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1656-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1656-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1656-2: No), the present dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1656-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command instructing the execution of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and performs the present dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process. To finish.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the roulette operation effect selection process (step S1657 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 66, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation effect execution determination process (S1657-1). In the roulette operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 13 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 13, the roulette operation effect. Judge the necessity of execution of.

FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect execution determination table. In the roulette operation effect execution judgment table, the set of the effect random value 13 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one to be referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately for what is referred to at the time. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 13 are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation effect is executed, and 55 (55 to 99) effects are used. The random number value 13 is associated with data indicating that the roulette operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 13 are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random values 13 are roulette. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

In step S1657-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the roulette operation effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1657-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1657-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1657-2: No), the roulette operation effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1657-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the roulette operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a mode of notifying the operation result of progress triggered by the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 14 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss), and the reach establishment in the fluctuation. The progress pattern of the roulette operation effect is determined based on the combination of the presence / absence of the roulette, the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation, the SP reach effect in the variation, and the random value 14 for the effect.

FIG. 67B is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect progress mode determination table. In the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table, the set of the effect random number value 14 and the progress pattern shows the jackpot judgment result (big hit or loss), the presence / absence of reach establishment, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, and the presence / absence of development to SP reach effect. It is stored for each combination and corresponding one.

Specifically, the choices corresponding to the combination of jackpot, no reach, no pseudo-continuous effect, and no SP reach effect in this table include progress pattern RL11 (roulette roll is "!") And progress pattern RL12. (The roulette roll is "Change"), the progress pattern RL13 (the roulette roll is "NEXT"), and the progress pattern RL14 (the roulette roll is "SP"). The progress pattern RL11 has 95 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has two effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has two effect random values 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has two effect random values 14. One effect random number value 14 is associated with each other.

There are progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14 as options corresponding to the combination of jackpot, reach establishment, no pseudo-continuous effect, and no SP reach effect. The progress pattern RL11 has 80 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 15 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 3 effect random values 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has 3 effect random values 14. Two effect random values 14 are associated with each other.

The options corresponding to the combination of jackpot, reach establishment, pseudo continuous effect, and no SP reach effect include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The progress pattern RL11 has 85 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 8 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 5 effect random values 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has 5 effect random values 14. Two effect random values 14 are associated with each other.

The options corresponding to the combination of jackpot, reach establishment, pseudo continuous effect, and SP reach effect include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, RL14, and RL15 (premium characters appear). The progress pattern RL11 has 85 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 5 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 5 effect random values 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has 5 effect random values 14. Four effect random values 14 are associated with each other, and one effect random value 14 is associated with the progress pattern RL15.

Options corresponding to combinations of loss, no reach establishment, no pseudo-continuous effect, and no SP reach effect include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The progress pattern RL11 has 97 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has one effect random value 14, the progress pattern RL13 has one effect random value 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has one effect random value 14. One effect random number value 14 is associated with each other.

Options corresponding to the combination of loss, reach establishment, no pseudo-continuous effect, and no SP reach effect include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The progress pattern RL11 has 84 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 13 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has two effect random values 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has two effect random values 14. One effect random number value 14 is associated with each other.

Options corresponding to the combination of loss, reach establishment, pseudo continuous effect, and no SP reach effect include progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, RL14, and RL15. The progress pattern RL11 has 88 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 7 effect random values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 4 effect random values 14, and the progress pattern RL14 has 4 effect random values 14. One effect random number value 14 is associated with each other. The progress pattern RL15 is not associated with any effect random value 14.

Here, in this table, the difference between the selection rate in the case of a jackpot in the progress pattern RL11 and the selection rate in the case of loss is a maximum of 4%, whereas the selection in the case of a jackpot in the progress patterns RL12, RL13, and RL14. The difference between the rate and the selection rate in the case of loss is a maximum of 1%. Progression pattern RL11 (roulette roll is "!") And progress pattern RL12 (roulette roll is "Change"), RL13 (roulette roll is "NEXT"), and RL14 (roulette roll is "SP"). ”), The progress pattern RL11 is more likely to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, and the progress patterns RL12, RL13, and RL14 are less likely to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot.

_{In step S1557-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t RL1 in} FIG. 16) of the operation reception valid period of the roulette operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and sets this time to 2 milliseconds. The value divided by is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the roulette operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. _{Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t RL2 in} FIG. 16) of the operation reception valid period of the roulette operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the roulette operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter is set to the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 16). It becomes 0 at t _RL2).

In step S1557-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area. The roulette operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the roulette operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1557-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the roulette operation effect selection process this time.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the details of the roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1659 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 68, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1659.1). In the roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 15 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the big hit determination result (big hit or loss) and the effect random number value 15, whether or not the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is executed. To judge.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a set of a random number value 15 for effect and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is displayed in the progress pattern RL15 (premium character) in the progress mode determination process. It is memorized separately for what is referred to when the line) is decided and what is referred to when other things are decided. Specifically, for the progress pattern RL15, data indicating that one (0) effect random value 12 executes the roulette operation specific advance notice effect, and 99 (1 to 99) effect random values 12 Is associated with data indicating that the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For those other than the progress pattern RL15, 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 12 are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For those other than the progress pattern RL15, no effect random number value 12 is associated with the data indicating that the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 executes the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol, the effect control board 120 executes the specific advance notice effect before executing the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect. To regulate.

In step S1659-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1659-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1659-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1659-2: No), the roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1659-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command instructing the execution of the roulette operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and performs the roulette operation specific notice effect selection process this time. To finish.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the details of the gauge operation effect selection process (step S1660 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation effect execution determination process (S1660-1). In the gauge operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 16 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 16, the gauge operation effect Judge the necessity of execution of.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a gauge operation effect execution determination table. In the gauge operation effect execution judgment table, the set of the effect random value 16 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one to be referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately for what is referred to at the time. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 16 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation effect is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effects are used. The random number value 16 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, 45 (0 to 44) effect random values 16 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation effect is executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random values 16 are gauges. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

In step S1660-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the gauge operation effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1660-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1660-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1660-2: No), the gauge operation effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1660-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the final stage determination process. The final stage determination process is a process for determining the final acquisition point of the gauge operation effect. In the final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random values 17, 18, and 19 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reference destination determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the receive buffer, whether or not the SP reach effect is developed, and the development to the SPSP reach effect. Based on the presence or absence, the upper table 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the middle table, and the lower table of the sub ROM 120b are determined as reference destinations. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reference destinations of the upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and determines the number of hundreds digits based on the effect random number value 17. The sub CPU 120a refers to the middle table and determines the number of tens digits based on the effect random number value 18. The sub CPU 120a refers to the lower table and determines the number of ones digit based on the effect random number value 19. Then, the sub CPU 120a adds the number of hundreds digit, the number of tens digit, and the number of ones digit, and sets the addition result as the final earned point.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a reference destination determination table. FIG. 73A is a diagram showing the upper table 1. FIG. 73B is a diagram showing the upper table 2. FIG. 73C is a diagram showing the upper table 3. FIG. 73 (d) is a diagram showing the upper table 4. FIG. 73 (e) is a diagram showing the upper table 5. FIG. 73 (f) is a diagram showing the upper table 6. FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing a medium table. FIG. 74 (b) is a diagram showing a lower table.

In the reference destination determination table, the reference destinations of the combination of the jackpot, no SP reach effect development, and no SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 1, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 1, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 7999.

The reference destinations of the combination of the jackpot, the SP reach effect development, and the SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 2, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 2, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 9999.

The reference destinations of the combination of the jackpot, the SP reach effect development, and the SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 3, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 3, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 13599.

The reference destinations of the combinations of loss, no SP reach effect development, and no SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 4, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 4, the middle table, and the lower table is a number other than 3333 in the range of 3001 to 7999.

The reference destinations of the combinations of loss, SP reach effect development, and SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 5, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 5, the middle table, and the lower table is the number excluding 3333 and 7777 in the range of 3001 to 9999. become.

The reference destinations of the combinations of loss, no SP reach effect development, and SPSP reach effect development are the upper table 6, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 6, the middle table, and the lower table is the number excluding 3333 and 7777 in the range of 3001 to 13599. become.

More specifically, in FIG. 73, the choices of top tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 include numbers in 500 increments between 1500 and 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 1, each number between 1500 and 7500 and 1 to 25 directing random values 17 are associated with 3333. No directing random number 17 is associated with each number between 8000 and 10000 and 7777. In the upper table 2, each number between 1500 and 9500, 3333, and 7777 are associated with 1 to 24 production random values 17. No random value 17 for production is associated with 10000. In the upper table 3, 1 to 24 production random values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 4, 2 to 25 directing random values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 7500. No directing random number 17 is associated with each of the numbers between 8000 and 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 5, 1 to 25 production random values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 9500. None of the effect random values 17 are associated with 10000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 6, 1 to 25 production random values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 10000. No production random number 17 is associated with 3333 and 7777.

In FIG. 74, the medium table options include numbers in 50 increments between 150 and 400. Each of these numbers is associated with 15 to 20 effect random values 18. The choices in the lower table include numbers between 1 and 99, excluding 33 and 77. One or two effect random values 19 are associated with each of these numbers. Here, when the upper tables 1, 2 and 3 are referred to and the number determined from the referenced tables 1, 2 or 3 is 3333 or 7777, the numbers determined from the middle table and the lower table are added. Instead, 3333 or 7777 will be the final score.

In step S1660-4, the sub CPU 120a performs the progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining a gauge progress pattern in the gauge operation effect. Gauge progress pattern, the final stage determination process time _t in the gauge operation effect in case of a final acquisition points 100% as determined by _GG0, t _{GG1, t GG2,} t _{GG3, t GG4,} and progress ratio of _{t GG5} Is shown. For example, the final acquisition point is 10000 points, the progress rate of the time _{t GG0 0%} progression rate of _{t GG1} 20%, progress ratio of the time _{t GG2} 30%, progress ratio of the time _{t GG3} 60% _{Assuming that} the progress rate of time t _{GG4 is 90% and the progress rate of time t GG5} is 100%, the mode of increase in the gauge progress amount is 0 (t _GG0 ) → 2000 (t _GG1 ) → 3000 (t _GG2 ) → 6000. (T _GG3 ) → 9000 (t _GG4 ) → 10000 (t _GG5 ). In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 20 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a determines the gauge progress pattern by referring to the gauge operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a gauge operation effect progress mode determination table. The gauge operation effect progress mode determination table stores a set of the effect random number value 20 and the gauge progress pattern. The options of the gauge operation effect progress state determination table include gauge progress patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14. The gauge progress patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14 have the same progress rate of _{time t GG0} and time t _{GG5 (time t GG0} is 0% and time t _GG5 is 100%), and time t _GG1 , t _GG2 , t. _GG3, and progress percentage of _{t GG4} has become a different value. Twenty-five effect random values 20 are associated with the gauge progression patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14, respectively.

_{In step S1660-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t GG3 in} FIG. 17) of the operation reception valid period of the gauge operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and sets this time to 2 milliseconds. The value divided by is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the gauge operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. _{Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t GG4 in} FIG. 13) of the operation reception valid period of the gauge operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the gauge operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter is set to the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 17). It becomes 0 at t _GG4).

In step S1660-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c in the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area. The gauge operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the gauge operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1660-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern specification command for designating the final acquisition point determined in the final stage determination process and the gauge evolution pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and this time gauge operation effect. The selection process ends.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the details of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1662 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 76, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1662-1). In the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 21 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is to be executed based on the combination of the final acquisition point and the effect random number value 21.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table, a set of the effect random value 21 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is the final stage determination process (step S1660-in FIG. 70). In 3), points of 10,000 or more are referred to as final points, points of 8000 to 9999 are referred to as final points, and points of less than 8000 are defined as final points. It is stored separately from the ones that are referred to at the time.

Specifically, for 10,000 or more, data indicating that 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 21 execute the gauge operation specific advance notice effect, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random values. 21 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For 8000 to 9999, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) effect random values 21 execute the gauge operation specific advance notice effect and 80 (20 to 99) effect random values 21 are gauge operations. It is associated with data indicating that the specific advance notice effect is not executed. For less than 8000, 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 21 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For less than 8000, no effect random number value 21 is associated with the data indicating that the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is executed. With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 executes the gauge operation effect as an effect that can progress to a stage of 8000 points or more during the variable display of the symbol, a specific notice is given before the execution of the gauge operation effect. It is possible to execute the production. Further, when the gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that cannot progress to the stage of 8000 points or more, it is restricted to execute the specific advance notice effect before executing the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect.

In step S1662-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1662-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1662-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1662-2: No), the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1662-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command instructing the execution of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and performs the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process this time. To finish.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the details of the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 78, the sub CPU 120a performs a timing operation effect execution determination process (S1663-1). In the timing operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 22 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the timing operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number value 22, the timing operation effect Judge the necessity of execution of.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a timing operation effect execution determination table. In the timing operation effect execution judgment table, the set of the effect random value 22 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one to be referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately for what is referred to at the time. Specifically, for the jackpot, the data indicating that 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 22 execute the timing operation effect and 45 (55 to 99) effect random values 22 are the timings. It is associated with the data indicating that the operation effect is not executed. Regarding the loss, the data indicating that 45 (0 to 44) effect random values 22 execute the timing operation effect and 55 (45 to 99) effect random values 22 do not execute the timing operation effect. It is associated with the data indicating that.

In step S1663-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the timing operation effect execution determination process is "execute" or "do not execute". When the determination result is "execute" (S1663-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1663-3. When the determination result is "do not execute" (S1663-2: No), the timing operation effect selection process this time is terminated.

In step S1663-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the timing operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a mode of notifying the operation result of progress when the operation is performed in accordance with the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 (time t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , t _{TM4 in FIG. 17).} It is a thing. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 23 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the timing operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and indicates whether or not the variation start command in the receive buffer has developed into the SP reach effect, whether or not the SPSP reach effect has been developed, and the random value for the effect. Based on the combination of 23, the progress pattern of the timing operation effect is determined.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a timing operation effect progress mode determination table. In the timing operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number value 23 and the progress pattern is stored for each item corresponding to the combination of the presence / absence of the SP reach effect and the presence / absence of the SPSP reach effect.

There is a progress pattern TM11 as an option corresponding to the combination of no SP reach effect development and no SPSP reach effect development in this table. The progress pattern TM11 is associated with 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 23. In the progress pattern TM11, when the operation is completed (the operation timing of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times is the appearance timing of the images of the first to fourth effect buttons 35, t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , t _TM4. When all of the above are met), the character image of "EXCELLENT" appears. Further, if the single operation is successful, the character image of "GOOD" appears every time the operation is successful, and if the single operation fails, the character image of "miss" appears every time the operation fails. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down before the image of the effect button 35 appears, all subsequent operations are invalidated. Further, in the progress pattern TM11, the development notification image (character image of "SP") does not appear even if the operation is completed.

There are progress patterns TM11 and TM12 as options corresponding to the combination with SP reach effect development in this table and without SPSP reach effect development. The progress pattern TM11 is associated with 45 (0 to 44) effect random values 23, and the progress pattern TM12 is associated with 55 (45 to 99) effect random values 23. .. In the progress pattern TM12, when the operation is completed, a character image of "EXCELLENT" appears. Further, if the single operation is successful, the character image of "GOOD" appears every time the operation is successful, and if the single operation fails, the character image of "miss" appears every time the operation fails. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down before the image of the effect button 35 appears, all subsequent operations are invalidated. Further, in the progress pattern TM12, unlike the progress pattern TM11, when the operation is completed, a development notification image (character image of “SP”) appears.

There are progress patterns TM11 and TM12 as options corresponding to the combination with no SP reach effect development and with SPSP reach effect development in this table. The progress pattern TM11 is associated with 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 23, and the progress pattern TM12 is associated with 45 (55 to 99) effect random values 23. ..

With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables the display of the development notification image after the completion of the operation when there is a development to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the fluctuation. Further, if there is no development in either the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the fluctuation, the display of the development notification image after the completion of the operation is restricted.

_{In step S1663-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing (time t TM1 in} FIG. 18) of the first image of the effect button 35 within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and sets this time to 2 mm. The value divided by seconds is set in the timing operation determination time (1) timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the second image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Timing operation determination time of sub RAM 120c (2) Set to timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM3 in} FIG. 18) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Timing operation determination time of sub RAM 120c (3) Set to timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Timing operation determination time of sub RAM 120c (4) Set to timer counter.

The timing operation determination time (1) timer counter, timing operation determination time (2) timer counter, timing operation determination time (3) timer counter, and timing operation determination time (4) timer counter executes the timer update process of step S1500. It counts down every time. The timing operation determination time (1) timer counter becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18), and the timing operation determination time (2) timer counter is the effect button 35. It becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the second image (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18), and the timing operation determination time (3) the timer counter is set to the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 (time in FIG. 18). It becomes 0 at t _TM3 ), and the timing operation determination time (4) timer counter becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM4 in FIG. 18).}

In step S1663-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the completion time of the pentagon having the image of the effect button 35 as the apex (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the timing operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period end timer counter is counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the time of completion of the pentagon (time t _{TM5 in FIG. 18).}

In step S1663-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the timing operation effect standby flag storage area. The timing operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the timing operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1663-7, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the timing operation effect selection process this time.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the details of the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 81, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not reach is established by the fluctuation (S1664-1). When the reach is established by the fluctuation (S1664-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1664-2. If the reach is not established due to the fluctuation (S1664-1: No), the current reach back button operation effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1664-2, the sub CPU 120a performs the progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the back button operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a mode of notifying the operation result that progresses when the operation is performed in accordance with _{the timing t NR of the reach establishment.} In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 24 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and reaches based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random value 24. Determine the progress pattern of the back button operation effect.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table. In the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random value 24 and the progress pattern is stored separately for those to be referred to when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot and those to be referred to when the jackpot is lost. There is.

The jackpot and corresponding options in this table include progress patterns RC11, RC12, and RC13. The progress pattern RC11 is associated with 10 (0 to 9) effect random values 24, and the progress pattern RC12 is associated with 70 (10 to 79) effect random values 24. , 20 (80 to 99) effect random values 24 are associated with the progress pattern RC13. The progress patterns RC11, RC12, and RC13 are the presence / absence and operation of the back button operation success voice when the back button operation is successful _{(when the operation timing of the operation button 35 matches the reach establishment timing t NR).} When (when the operation timing of the operation button 35 _{does not match the timing t NR at} which the reach is established), the presence or absence of an image display indicating that is different.

Specifically, in the progress pattern RC11, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success voice is output. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC12, the back button operation success voice is not output regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC13, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success voice is output. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC13, if the operation fails, a character image of "regrettable" is displayed.

The options corresponding to the loss in this table include progress patterns RC12 and RC14. The progress pattern RC12 is associated with 80 (0 to 79) effect random values 24, and the progress pattern RC14 is associated with 20 (80 to 99) effect random values 24. There is. In the progress pattern RC14, the back button operation success voice is not output regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. If the back button operation fails, the character image of "regrettable" is displayed. Further, in the progress pattern RC14, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated.

With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 can output the back button operation success voice when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation. In addition, when the fluctuation is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss, the output of the back button operation success voice is regulated regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation.

Here, when the timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80) and the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 82) are compared, there are two progresses in the timing operation effect progress mode determination table. There are patterns TM11 and TM12, and both of these two evolution patterns TM11 and TM12 are adapted to display a character image of "mistake" indicating that when a single operation fails. On the other hand, in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table, only the progress patterns RC13 and RC14 out of the four progress patterns RC11, RC12, RC13, and RC14 have the character "regret" indicating that when the operation fails. Images are displayed, and the selectivity of the progress patterns RC13 and RC14 is as low as 20%. The reason for doing this is that if the character image of "regrettable" appears too frequently, the player can easily succeed in operating the back button, and the interest of the game is rather impaired.

In step S1664-3, the sub CPU 120a obtains _{the remaining time until the reach establishment time (time t NR in} FIG. 19) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds. Reach back button Judgment time Set to timer counter. The reach back button determination time timer counter counts down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The reach back button determination time timer counter becomes 0 at the time when the reach is established (time t _{NR in FIG. 19).}

In step S1664-4, the sub CPU120a a predetermined time from when the reach of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation T (e.g., 2 seconds) the end time t at time reach back button operation acceptance lifetime after only _'NR and then obtains a remaining time until the time t _'NR, sets the remaining time value obtained by dividing by two milliseconds operation accepting validity end timer counter for reach back button operation effect of the sub RAM120c obtained. The operation reception valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 2 seconds after the reach is established.

In step S1664-5, the sub CPU 120a sets the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area. The reach back button operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the reach back button operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1664-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the reach back button operation effect selection process this time.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the details of the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47). In FIG. 83, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the step-up effect as the symbol variation effect of the variation (S1665-1). When the sub CPU 120a executes the step-up effect (S1665-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1665-2. When the step-up effect is not executed (S1665-1: No), the step-up back button operation effect selection process is terminated.

In step S1665-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up effect within the fluctuation develops to the normal stage 4. When the sub CPU 120a develops to the normal stage 4 (S1665-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1665-3. If it does not develop to the normal stage 4 (S1665-2: No), the step-up back button operation effect selection process of this time is ended.

In step S1665-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining the progress pattern of the step-up back button operation effect. Progress pattern shows a notification manner of operation results progress as triggered by back button operation decision timing (time _t UR1 in FIG _{20, t UR2, t UR3,} t UR4) in the combined operation is performed .. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 25 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and is based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random value 25. Step up Determine the progress pattern of the back button operation effect.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table. Step-up back button operation In the effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random value 25 and the progress pattern is stored separately for reference when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot and reference when the jackpot is lost. ing.

The jackpot and corresponding options in this table include progress patterns RU11, RU12, and RU13. The progress pattern RU 11 is associated with 10 (0 to 9) effect random values 25, and the progress pattern RU 12 is associated with 70 (10 to 79) effect random values 25. The progress pattern RU13 is associated with 20 (80 to 99) effect random values 25. Progress pattern RU11, RU12, and RU13, when a successful back button operation (when the operation timing of the plurality of operation performance button 35 is fit with all the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4) the presence or absence of the display of the back button operation successful image, and when it fails to operate the that in (when the operation timing of the performance button 35 has not match with any of the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4) The presence or absence of the image display shown is different.

Specifically, in the progress pattern RU11, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success image is displayed. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU12, the back button operation success image is not displayed regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU13, when the back button operation is successful, the back button operation success image is displayed. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU13, if the operation fails, a character image of "regrettable" is displayed.

The options corresponding to the loss in this table include the progress patterns RU12 and RU14. The progress pattern RU 12 is associated with 80 (0 to 79) effect random values 25, and the progress pattern RU 14 is associated with 20 (80 to 99) effect random values 25. There is. In the progress pattern RU14, the back button operation success image is not displayed regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. Further, if the effect button 35 is held down, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU14, if the operation fails, a character image of "regrettable" is displayed.

With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 is to execute the step-up back button operation effect, when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the variable display, the back button operation success image is displayed. Enables display. In addition, when the variable display is to stop at a symbol corresponding to the loss, the display of the back button operation success image is restricted regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation.

Here, comparing the timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80) and the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84) mentioned above, there are two in the timing operation effect progress mode determination table. There are progress patterns TM11 and TM12, and both of these two progress patterns TM11 and TM12 are adapted to display a character image of "mistake" indicating that when a single operation fails. On the other hand, in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table, only the progress patterns RU13 and RU14 out of the four progress patterns RU11, RU12, RU13, and RU14 are the characters of "regret" indicating that when the operation fails. Images are displayed, and the selectivity of the progress patterns RU13 and RU14 is as low as 20%. The reason for doing this is that if the character image of "regrettable" appears too frequently, the player can easily succeed in operating the back button, and the interest of the game is rather impaired.

In step S1665-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains _{the remaining time until the first back button operation determination timing (time t UR1 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The value is set in the back button operation determination time (1) timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the second back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the value of the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation judgment time (2) Set to the timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is the value of the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation judgment time (3) Set to the timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the value of the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation judgment time (4) Set to the timer counter.

Back button operation judgment time (1) Timer counter, back button operation judgment time (2) Timer counter, back button operation judgment time (3) Timer counter, and back button operation judgment time (4) The timer counter is the timer of step S1500. It is counted down every time the update process is executed. The back button operation determination time (1) timer counter becomes 0 at the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20), and the back button operation determination time (2) timer counter is the second. The back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) becomes 0, and the back button operation determination time (3) timer counter becomes 0 at the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20). Then, the back button operation determination time (4) timer counter becomes 0 at the _{fourth back button operation determination timing (time t UR4 in FIG. 20).}

In step S1665-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 of the step-up effect (time t _{SUP4 in FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and obtains the remaining time.} Is divided by 2 milliseconds and set in the timer counter for the end of the operation reception valid period for the step-up back button operation effect of the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period end timer counter for step-up back button operation effect counts down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 (time t _{SUP4 in FIG. 20).}

In step S1665-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area. The step-up back button operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the step-up back button operation effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1665-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current back button operation effect selection process.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the details of the special game effect selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 48). In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is a 2R probability variation hit (S1691-1). If the type of jackpot is 2R probability variation (S1691-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-2. If it is not a 2R probability variation (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 2R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is a 16R probability variation hit. If the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation (S1691-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-4. If it is not a 16R probability variation (S1691-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-5.

In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 16R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game this time is an 8R probability variation hit. If the type of jackpot is 8R probability variation (S1691-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-6. In the case of 8R normal hit (S1691-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-7.

In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the promotion success effect, and stores the promotion effect execution data indicating that the promotion success effect is executed in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. To do.

In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the promotion failure effect, and stores the promotion effect execution data indicating that the promotion failure effect is executed in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. To do.

After executing step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 8R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command for the opening effect determined in steps S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. After that, the special game selection process this time is completed.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing details of the round effect control process (step S1693 in FIG. 48). In FIG. 86, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the receive buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2 when the round start command in the receive buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes). If it is a round other than the fourth round (S1693-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1963-6.

In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the promotion effect execution data is stored in the round-specific effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the promotion effect execution data is stored in the sub CPU 120a (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. If the promotion effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-6.

In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the promotion effect execution data in the round-specific effect information storage area indicates the execution of the promotion success effect or the execution of the promotion failure effect. When the promotion effect execution data indicates the execution of the promotion success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4. When the promotion effect execution data indicates the execution of the promotion failure effect (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion success effect standby flag storage area in the promotion effect success standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and proceeds to step S1693-5. The promotion success effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the promotion success effect is waiting to be executed.

In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the _{start time (time t RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hit operation in the round game of this round (fourth round), and this time. Is divided by 2 milliseconds and set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for promotion effect of the sub RAM 120c. _{Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t RDE in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of the promotion effect in this round game, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds. Set to the timer counter for the end of the operation reception valid period for promotion production. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at _{the start time (time t RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of the repeated hit operation. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period of the repeated hit operation (time t _{RDE in FIG. 21).}

In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command for the round effect of this round in the transmission buffer.

87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, and 93 are flowcharts showing the details of the effect input control process (step S1700 in FIG. 45). In FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a performs the operation information storage area update process. The operation information storage area update process is a process for updating the information in the operation information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

FIG. 94A is a diagram showing an operation information storage area. FIG. 94B is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the operation information storage area includes an upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, a lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a center key. It has a sampling signal storage area, an effect button sampling signal storage area, an effect button on-edge storage area, an effect button off-edge storage area, an effect button off-edge number storage area, and an effect button on-off-edge signal number storage area. ..

The effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge number storage area, and the effect button on-off-edge signal number storage area each have the latest sampling timing information. It has the latest sampling storage unit for storing the above and the pre-sampling storage unit for storing the information of the sampling timing immediately before (2 ms before).

In the operation information storage area update process, the sub CPU 120a updates the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A. Further, the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B. Further, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Further, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Further, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area are updated. To do.

More specifically, at the sampling timing every 2 ms, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF, the sub CPU 120a writes 1. For example, write 0 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written in the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written in the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area.

The sub CPU 120a supplies the information of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area to the pre-sampling storage unit. Copy each. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 94B, if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and the detection switch 35a If the input signal of is OFF, 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area. If the pre-sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage unit is 1, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button on-edge signal storage area, and other combinations. If (pre-sampling signal is 1 → latest sampling signal is 1, pre-sampling signal is 0 → latest sampling signal is 0, or pre-sampling signal is 1 → latest sampling signal is 0), the effect button on-edge signal storage area. Write 0 to the latest sampling storage unit of.

If the pre-sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage unit is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button off-edge signal storage area, and other combinations. If (pre-sampling signal is 1 → latest sampling signal is 1, pre-sampling signal is 0 → latest sampling signal is 0, or pre-sampling signal is 0 → latest sampling signal is 1), the effect button off-edge signal storage area. Write 0 to the latest sampling storage unit of.

If 1 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the sub CPU 120a rewrites the number of the latest sampling storage units of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area to +1 to perform the effect button sampling. If 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the signal storage area, the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is reset to 0.

In step S1702 of FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dialogue operation effect standby flag is set in the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The dialogue operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined in the dialogue operation effect selection process (step S1654 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation that the dialogue operation effect is to be executed. When the dialogue operation effect standby flag is set (S1702: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. If the dialogue operation effect standby flag is not set (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect (time t _{SR1 to t SR2 in} FIG. 15), the judgment result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation reception valid period of the dialogue operation effect (FIG. 15). At time t _SR2 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 0 is written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation result notification designation command instructing the progress of the operation result to the notification in the dialogue operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1707. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform an effect (FIG. 15) related to the display of characters and lines. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a clears the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1708 of FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area. The roulette operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined in the roulette operation effect selection process (step S1659 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation that the roulette operation effect is to be executed. When the roulette operation effect standby flag is set (S1708: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1709. If the roulette operation effect standby flag is not set (S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1709, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the roulette operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period of the roulette operation effect (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the roulette operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the roulette operation effect (time t _{RL1 to t RL2 in} FIG. 16), the judgment result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation reception valid period of the roulette operation effect (FIG. 16). At time t _RL2 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1710: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1711. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1711: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1712. If 0 is written (S1711: No), the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation result notification designation command instructing the progress of the operation result to the notification in the roulette operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1713. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform an effect (FIG. 16) related to the display of the roulette roll. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a clears the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1714 of FIG. 88, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area. The gauge operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined in the gauge operation effect selection process (step S1660 of FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation that the gauge operation effect is to be executed. When the gauge operation effect standby flag is set (S1714: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1715. If the gauge operation effect standby flag is not set (S1714: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1715, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the gauge operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1715: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1716. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1715: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1716, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the gauge operation effect is 0. Within operation accepting validity of the gauge operation effect (time t _{GG3 ~t} GG4 of Fig. _17), in this step the determination result is "No", the end time of the operation acceptance lifetime gauge operation effect (in FIG. 17 At time t _GG4 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1716: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1717. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1716: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1718.

In step S1717, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1717: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1718. If 0 is written (S1717: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1718, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation result notification designation command instructing the progress of the operation result to the notification in the gauge operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1719. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31 and the audio output device produce an effect (FIG. 17) related to the re-rise of the gauge progress amount and the display of the final acquisition point. 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

In step S1719, the sub CPU 120a clears the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720 of FIG. 89, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the timing operation effect standby flag storage area. The timing operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined in the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation that the timing operation effect is to be executed. When the timing operation effect standby flag is set (S1720: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1721. If the timing operation effect standby flag is not set (S1720: No), the process proceeds to step S1736.

In step S1721, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for timing operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the time when the pentagon of the image of the effect button 35 in the timing operation effect is completed (time t _{TM5 in FIG. 18).} When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1721: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1722. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1721: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1722, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (4) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM4 in FIG. 18).} The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1723 when the timing operation effect determination time (4) timer counter is not 0 (S1722: No). Timing operation effect determination time (4) When the timer counter is 0 (S1722: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1723, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (3) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM3 in FIG. 18).} The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1724 when the timing operation effect determination time (3) timer counter is not 0 (S1723: No). Timing operation effect determination time (3) When the timer counter is 0 (S1723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1724, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (2) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the appearance timing of the second image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM2 in FIG. 18).} The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1725 when the timing operation effect determination time (2) timer counter is not 0 (S1724: No). Timing operation effect determination time (2) When the timer counter is 0 (S1724: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1725, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (1) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM1 in FIG. 18).} The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1727 when the timing operation effect determination time (1) timer counter is not 0 (S1725: No). Timing operation effect determination time (1) When the timer counter is 0 (S1725: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1726, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held pressed) by 2 milliseconds. To do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated for 1 second or longer at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , or t _{TM4 in FIG. 18), this} The determination result of the step is "Yes". The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1735 when the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on and off edge is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (S1726: Yes). When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on and off edge is less than a predetermined value (S1726: No), the process proceeds to step S1727.

In step S1727, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. When 1 is written (S1727: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1728. If 0 is written (S1727: No), the process proceeds to step S1736.

In step S1728, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process for determining whether or not the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35, and the first image, the second image, the third image, and the fourth image of the effect button 35. The time difference between each appearance timing and each is calculated, and if the time difference obtained is less than the predetermined reference value, the operation is successful, and if the time difference is less than the reference value, the operation is unsuccessful.

In step S1729, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination process in step S1728 is the operation success. If the operation fails (S1729: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1730. If the operation is successful (S1729: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

In step S1730, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure specification command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 does not match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1736. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the failure designation command, the effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of "miss" is displayed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1731, the sub CPU120a updates the successful operation number _{N TM} timing operation success number storage area of the sub RAM120c by +1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1732.

In step S1732, the sub CPU120a judges whether or not the operation succeeds number _{N TM} updated reaches 4. Sub CPU120a, when the operation succeeds number _{N TM} has not reached at 4 (S1732: No), the process proceeds to step S1733. If the operation succeeds number _{N TM} reaches 4 (S1732: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1734.

In step S1733, the sub CPU 120a sets a success designation command in the transmission buffer indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and proceeds to step S1736. This success designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the success designation command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform an effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of "GOOD". , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1734, the sub CPU 120a sets in the transmission buffer a completion designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 over a plurality of times matches all of the four appearance timings of the image of the effect button 35. The process proceeds to step S1736. This completion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the success designation command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform an effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of "EXCELLENT". , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. Further, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 have a progress pattern TM12 in the timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80) in the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. When is determined, the effect (FIG. 18) related to the display of the character image of "SP" is executed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. Let me.

In step S1735, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1736.

Here, in the timing operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous striking operation (an operation of pressing the effect button 35 a plurality of times) from before to after the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the operation is performed a plurality of times. If any of the operation timings does not match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, each operation proceeds in the order of S1727: Yes → S1728 → S1729: No → S1730 after the processing in S1720 to S1726. The text image of "Miss" is displayed. If any of the operation timings of the plurality of operations matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result in step S1729 becomes "Yes" at that time. After that, when the process proceeds in the order of S1731 → S1732: No → S1733, the character image of “GOOD” is displayed. When the process proceeds in the order of S1731 → S1732: Yes → S1734, the character image of “EXCELLENT” is displayed.

Further, when the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result in step S1726 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S1735 to clear the timing operation effect standby flag. Will be done. After the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result in step S1720 is "No", and any character image of "miss", "GOOD", and "EXCELLENT" is displayed regardless of the operation of the effect button 35. It disappears.

Due to such a flow of processing, when the effect control board 120 executes the timing operation effect, the operation for the effect button 35 is performed a plurality of times, and the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations is set. When the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is matched, the effect of notifying the operation result in the effect mode according to the operation timing and the appearance timing (the effect of displaying the character image of "GOOD" or "EXCELLENT"). ) Can be executed. Further, when the operation timing of any of the plurality of operations does not match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the effect of notifying the operation result in the effect mode according to the match between the operation timing and the appearance timing. (The effect of displaying the character image of "GOOD" or "EXCELLENT") The effect of restricting the execution and notifying the operation result in the effect mode according to the fact that the operation timing and the appearance timing did not match (the character of "Miss") It is possible to execute the effect of displaying an image). Further, when the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period (1 second) or more including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the execution of the effect itself for notifying the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

In step S1736 of FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button operation effect standby flag is set in the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The reach back button operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the reach back button operation effect in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. It is a thing. When the reach back button operation effect standby flag is set (S1736: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1737. If the reach back button operation effect standby flag is not set (S1736: No), the process proceeds to step S1746.

In step S1737, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the reach back button operation ( _{1 second after the reach establishment time t NR in FIG. 19).} When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1737: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1738. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1737: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1745.

In step S1738, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button determination time timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is 0. Until the timing of establishment of reach (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the reach back button determination time timer counter is 0 (S1738: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1739. If the reach back button determination time timer counter is not 0 (S1738: No), the process proceeds to step S1740.

In step S1739, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held pressed) by 2 milliseconds. To do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated for 1 second or longer at the timing of establishment of reach (time t _{NR in FIG. 19), the determination result of this step is “Yes”.} The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1740 when the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than a predetermined value (S1739: No). When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on-off edge is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1739: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1745.

In step S1740, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the effect button 35 is not pressed or is continuously operated (is held down), the result is "Yes". The determination result of this step is "No". When 1 is written (S1740: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1741. If 0 is written (S1740: No), the process proceeds to step S1745.

In step S1741, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process for determining whether or not the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains a time difference between the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35 and the timing of establishment of reach, and if the obtained time difference is less than a predetermined reference value, the operation is successful and is equal to or greater than the reference value. If so, the operation fails.

In step S1742, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination process in step S1741 is the operation success. If the operation is unsuccessful (S1742: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1743, and if the operation is successful (S1742: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1744.

In step S1743, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 does not match the timing of establishment of reach in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1746. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 progress in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 82) in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. When the pattern RC13 or RC14 is determined, when the failure designation command is received, the effect related to the display of the character image of "regrettable" is produced by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b, and the effect. Let the effect lighting device 34 execute.

In step S1744, the sub CPU 120a sets a success designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 matches the timing of establishment of reach in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1745. This success designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 progress in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 82) in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. When the pattern RC11 or RC13 is determined, when the success designation command is received, the effect related to the output of the "transcendentally cute" sound (FIG. 19) is displayed by the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1745, the sub CPU 120a clears the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1746.

Here, in the reach back button operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous striking operation (an operation of pressing the effect button 35 a plurality of times) from before to after the establishment of the reach, among the plurality of operations. If any of the operation timings does not match the timing of establishing the reach, each operation proceeds in the order of S1740: Yes → S1741 → S1742: No → S1743 after the processing in S1736 to S1739, and the character “regrettable” is displayed. The image can be displayed. If any of the operation timings of the plurality of operations matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of S1742 becomes "Yes" at that time, the process proceeds to step S1744, and the voice of "transcendence cute" is heard. Can be output.

Further, when the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the timing when the reach is established, the determination result in step S1739 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S1745 to clear the timing operation effect standby flag. .. After the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result in step S1736 is "No", and regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, the display of the character image of "regrettable" and the output of the voice of "transcendence cute" are also performed. Will not be done.

Due to such a flow of processing, when the effect control board 120 executes the timing operation effect, the operation for the effect button 35 is performed a plurality of times, and the operation timing of any of the plurality of operations reaches. When the timing of the establishment of is matched, it is possible to execute the production of notifying the operation result (the production of outputting the "transcendent cute" voice) in the production mode according to the timing of the establishment of the reach and the operation timing. And. In addition, when the operation timing of any of the multiple operations does not match the timing of the establishment of the reach, the operation result is notified in the production mode according to the timing of the establishment of the reach and the operation timing. A production that regulates the execution of (the production that outputs the voice of "transcendence cute") and notifies the operation result in the production mode according to the timing of the operation timing and the timing of the establishment of the reach (the character image of "regret"). It is possible to execute the effect). Further, when the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period (1 second) or more including the timing of establishment of the reach, the execution of the effect itself for notifying the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the timing of the establishment of the reach, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

In step S1746 of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set with the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area. The step-up back button operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the step-up back button operation effect in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. It is to be set. When the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is set (S1746: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1747. If the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is not set (S1746: No), the process proceeds to step S1761.

In step S1747, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. The determination result of this step is "No" until the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 in the step-up effect (time t _{SUP4 in FIG. 20).} When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1747: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1748. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1747: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1760.

In step S1748, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1749 when the step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) timer counter is not 0 (S1748: No). Step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) When the timer counter is 0 (S1748: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1749, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1750 when the step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) timer counter is not 0 (S1749: No). Step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) When the timer counter is 0 (S1749: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1750, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the second back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1751 when the step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) timer counter is not 0 (S1750: No). Step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) When the timer counter is 0 (S1750: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1751, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1753 when the step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) timer counter is not 0 (S1751: No). Step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) When the timer counter is 0 (S1751: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1752, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held pressed) by 2 milliseconds. To do. Step-up back button operation decision timing (time _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , or _{t UR4)} in, if it is continuously operated performance button 35 for more than 1 second, the determination result of this step is "Yes" It becomes. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on and off edge is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (S1752: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1760. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on and off edge is less than a predetermined value (S1752: No), the process proceeds to step S1753.

In step S1753, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the effect button 35 is not pressed or is continuously operated (is held down), the result is "Yes". The determination result of this step is "No". When 1 is written (S1753: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1754. If 0 is written (S1753: No), the process proceeds to step S1761.

In step S1754, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process for determining whether or not the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains a time difference between the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35 and each of the four back button operation determination timings, and if the obtained time difference is less than a predetermined reference value. If it is, the operation is considered successful, and if there is nothing less than the standard value, the operation is considered unsuccessful.

In step S1755, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination process in step S1754 is successful. If the operation fails (S1755: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1756. If the operation is successful (S1755: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1757.

In step S1756, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 does not match the back button operation determination timing in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1761. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 are in the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84) in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. When the failure designation command is received when the progress pattern RU13 or RU14 of the above is determined, the effect related to the display of the character image of "regrettable" is displayed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive devices 33a and 33b. , And the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1757, the sub CPU120a updates the successful operation number _{N UR} of the back button operation success number storage area of the sub RAM120c by +1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1758.

In step S1758, the sub CPU120a judges whether or not the operation succeeds number _{N UR} updated reaches 4. Sub CPU120a, when the operation succeeds number _{N UR} has not reached at 4 (S1758: No), the process proceeds to step S1759. If the operation succeeds number _{N UR} reaches 4 (S1758: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1761.

In step S1759, the sub CPU 120a sets a completion designation command in the transmission buffer indicating that the operation timings of the operations of the effect button 35 for a plurality of times match all of the four back button operation determination timings, and proceeds to step S1761. .. This completion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 are in the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84) in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 of FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. When the success designation command is received when the progress pattern RU11 or RU13 is determined, the effect (FIG. 20) related to the display of the character image of "Congratulations" is displayed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive. The devices 33a and 33b and the effect lighting device 34 are made to execute.

In step S1760, the sub CPU 120a clears the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1761.

Here, in the step-up back button operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous striking operation (an operation of pressing the effect button 35 a plurality of times) from before to after the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, a plurality of operations are performed. If any of the operation timings does not match the step-up back button operation judgment timing, the processing in S1746 to S1752 is followed by S1753: Yes → S1754 → S1755: No → S1756. When the progress pattern is the progress pattern RU13 or RU14, the character image of "regrettable" may be displayed. If any of the operation timings of the plurality of operations matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, the determination result of S1755 is “Yes” at that time. After that, when the process proceeds in the order of S1757 → S1758: Yes → S1759, the character image of “Congratulations” may be displayed when the current production pattern is the progress pattern RC11 or RC13.

Further, when the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result in step S1752 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S1760 to wait for the step-up back button operation effect. The flag is cleared. After clearing the step-up back button operation effect standby flag, the determination result in step S1746 is "No", and both "sorry" and "congratulations" character images are displayed regardless of the operation of the effect button 35. It disappears.

Due to such a flow of processing, when the effect control board 120 is to execute the step-up back button operation effect, the operation for the effect button 35 is performed a plurality of times, and the operation of any one of the plurality of times is performed. When the timing matches the step-up back button operation judgment timing, the operation result is notified in the production mode according to the operation timing and the step-up back button operation judgment timing (displays the character image of "Congratulations"). It is possible to execute the production). In addition, when the operation timing of any of the multiple operations does not match the step-up back button operation determination timing, the operation result is displayed in an effect mode according to the matching between the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing. It regulates the execution of the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character image of "Congratulations"), and notifies the operation result in the effect mode according to the match between the operation timing and the step-up back button operation judgment timing ("Sorry". It is possible to execute the effect of displaying the character image of "". Further, when the operation on the effect button 35 is performed for a predetermined period (1 second) or more including the step-up back button operation determination timing, the execution of the effect itself for notifying the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

In step S1761 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the first accessory operation effect standby flag is set in the first accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The first accessory operation effect standby flag is set when a symbol variation effect pattern including the first accessory operation effect is selected in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1644 of FIG. 46) at the start of the fluctuation of the variation. Is to be done. When the first accessory operation effect standby flag is set (S1761: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1762. If the first accessory operation effect standby flag is not set (S1761: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1762, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the first accessory operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period for the first accessory operation effect (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1762: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1763. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1762: No), the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1763, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the first accessory operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the first character operation effect (time t _{AY1 to t AY2 in} FIG. 10), the judgment result of this step is "No", and the operation reception valid period of the first character operation effect At the end time (time t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1763: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1764. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1763: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1765.

In step S1764, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1764: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1765. If 0 is written (S1764: No), the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1765, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation result notification designation command instructing the progress to the notification of the operation result in the first accessory operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1766. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. In the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1644 of FIG. 46) at the start of the variation of the variation, when the symbol variation effect pattern including the first accessory operation effect with the accessory falling is selected, the image control board 150 and the image control board 150 and When the lamp control board 140 receives the operation result notification designation command, the lamp control board 140 performs an effect related to the fall of the first movable accessory 330a (FIG. 10A) by displaying the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1766, the sub CPU 120a clears the first accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1767 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the second accessory operation effect standby flag is set in the second accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The second accessory operation effect standby flag is set when a symbol variation effect pattern including the second accessory operation effect is selected in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1644 of FIG. 46) at the start of the fluctuation of the variation. It is to be set. When the second accessory operation effect standby flag is set (S1767: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1768. If the second accessory operation effect standby flag is not set (S1767: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1768, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the second accessory operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation reception valid period for the second accessory operation effect (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1768: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1769. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1768: No), the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1769, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the second accessory operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the second character operation effect (time t _{SY1 to t SY2 in} FIG. 11), the judgment result of this step is "No", and the operation reception valid period of the second character operation effect At the end time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1770 when the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1769: No), and proceeds to step S1771 when the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1769: Yes).

In step S1770, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1770: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1771. If 0 is not written (S1771: No), the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1771, the sub CPU 120a sets the operation result notification designation command instructing the progress of the operation result to the notification in the second accessory operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1772. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the symbol variation effect pattern including the second accessory operation effect with the accessory tilt is selected in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1644 of FIG. 46) at the start of the variation of the variation, the image control board 150 and When the lamp control board 140 receives the operation result notification designation command, the lamp control board 140 performs an effect related to the tilt of the second movable accessory 330b (FIG. 11 (a)) on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

In step S1772, the sub CPU 120a clears the second accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1773 of FIG. 93, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the promotion effect is 0. _{After the start time (time t RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of the continuous hitting effect in the promotion effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1773: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1774. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1773: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1774, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for the promotion effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the continuous hit operation of the promotion effect (time t _{RDS to t RDE in} FIG. 21), the judgment result of this step is "No", and the end time of the operation reception valid period of the continuous hit operation (FIG. 21). At time t _RDE ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1774: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1775. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1774: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1780.

In step S1775, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held pressed) by 2 milliseconds. To do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated (held) for 1 second or longer, the determination result of this step is "Yes". The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1776 when the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than a predetermined value (S1775: No). When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the signal number storage area between the effect button on-off edge is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1775: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1776, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. Immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When 1 is written (S1776: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1777. If 0 is written (S1776: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1777, the sub CPU120a updates the pummel number _{N RD} of battered number storage area of the sub RAM120c by +1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1778.

In step S1778, the sub CPU120a determines whether battered number _{N RD} updated reaches 30. If the number of times the effect button 35 is pressed after the guidance image of "Continuous hit!" Is displayed reaches 30 times, the judgment result of this step is "Yes", and if it does not reach 30 times, this step is performed. The determination result is "No". Sub CPU120a, when repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has not reached 30 (S1778: No), the process proceeds to step S1779. If repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has reached 30 (S1778: Yes), the process proceeds to step S 1780.

In step S1779, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect progress designation command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1783. This effect progress designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the effect progress designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute an effect of advancing the gauge progress amount of the gauge image to the right by a predetermined amount.

In step S1780, it is determined whether or not the promotion success production standby flag is set in the promotion success production standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The promotion success production standby flag is set at the start of the round game of the fourth round in the special game of the 8R probability variation jackpot. When the promotion success production standby flag is set (S1780: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1781. If the promotion success production standby flag is not set (S1780: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1781, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion failure effect designation command instructing the execution of the promotion failure effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1784. This promotion failure effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the promotion failure effect designation command, the promotion failure effect (FIG. 21 (b)) is transmitted to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and the effect drive devices 33a and 33b. And the effect lighting device 34 is executed.

In step S1782, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion success effect designation command instructing the execution of the promotion success effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1783. This promotion success effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the promotion success effect designation command, the promotion success effect (FIG. 21 (a)) is transmitted to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and the effect drive devices 33a and 33b. And the effect lighting device 34 is executed.

In step S1783, the sub CPU 120a clears the promotion effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1784, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer. This operation designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the effect according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E.

The above is the details of this embodiment. According to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
First, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of operation effects (first character operation effect, second character operation effect, dialogue operation effect, roulette operation) that progress to notification of the operation result triggered by the operation of the effect button 35 There are effects (effects, gauge operation effects, timing operation effects), and one or more of these effects are executed as symbol variation effects. Further, among these plurality of types of operation effects, in the first character operation effect, the second character operation effect, the dialogue operation effect, the roulette operation effect, and the gauge operation effect, the jackpot determination result and the progress after the operation of the effect button 35 are performed. Regardless of the mode of the above, a common normal advance notice effect (an effect of displaying a guide image or an indicator image prompting the operation of the effect button 35) is executed, and then the first accessory operation effect and the second accessory operation are performed. Individual specific advance notice effects can be executed according to the mode of notification of each operation result of the effect, the dialogue operation effect, the roulette operation effect, and the gauge operation effect. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the operation production.

Secondly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is likely to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol (roulette operation effect). Of the multiple types of productions of the first character operation effect, the roulette roll is "!"), And the effect that is difficult to select when the jackpot judgment result is not a big hit (the first with the character falling). 1) In the case of executing the character operation effect), it is regulated to execute the specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect, and the first character is executed. Before the operation of the effect button 35 in the operation effect, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when both the first character operation effect and the roulette operation effect are executed during the variable display of the symbol.

Thirdly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is likely to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the dialogue operation effect during the variable display of the symbol (the dialogue operation effect). It is difficult to select when the jackpot judgment result is not a jackpot among the multiple types of productions of the first character operation effect and the dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B, and C are the dialogue speakers. When executing the first character operation effect), it is restricted to execute a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation before the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect. 1 Before the operation of the effect button 35 in the accessory operation effect, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when both the first character operation effect and the dialogue operation effect are executed during the variable display of the symbol.

Fourth, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is likely to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol (roulette operation effect). A production that is difficult to select when the jackpot judgment result is not a jackpot (gauge operation with a final score of 8000 or more) among the productions of multiple types of production modes of the roulette roll (!) When executing the effect), before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect, it is restricted to execute the specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation, and the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect is executed. Before the operation, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when both the gauge operation effect and the roulette operation effect are executed during the variable display of the symbol.

Fifth, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is likely to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the dialogue operation effect during the variable display of the symbol. A production that is difficult to select when the jackpot judgment result is not a jackpot (final score is 8000 or more) among the productions of multiple types of production modes of the character A, B, and C as the dialogue speaker) and the gauge operation production. When executing the gauge operation effect), it is restricted to execute a specific notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation before the operation of the effect button 35 in the dialogue operation effect, and the effect in the gauge operation effect. Before the operation of the button 35, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when both the gauge operation effect and the dialogue operation effect are executed during the variable display of the symbol.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the first embodiment, when the gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that can progress to a stage of 8000 points or more, it is possible to execute the specific advance notice effect before the execution of the gauge operation effect, and the stage of 8000 points or more. When a gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that cannot progress to, it is restricted to execute a specific advance notice effect before the gauge operation effect is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the final score is either 7777 or 3333, which is the final winning point (7777 in the example of FIG. 95 (d)). When executing the gauge operation effect, it is possible to execute the specific advance notice effect before the execution of the gauge operation effect, and in other cases, it is regulated to execute the specific advance notice effect before the execution of the gauge operation effect. ..

The contents of the gauge operation specific advance notice execution determination table referred to in step S1662-1 of the gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process (FIG. 76) are different between the first embodiment and the present embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a gauge operation specific advance notice execution determination table. In the gauge operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the present embodiment, a set of the effect random value 21 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is the final stage determination process (FIG. 70). In step S1660-3) of the above, the reference is made when 7777 is the final score, the reference is made when 3333 is the final score, and the reference is made at other times. It is remembered.

Specifically, for 7777, data indicating that 55 (0 to 54) effect random values 21 execute the gauge operation specific advance notice effect, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random values. 21 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. Regarding 3333, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) effect random values 21 execute the gauge operation specific advance notice and 80 (20 to 99) effect random values 21 are gauge operation specific advance notices. It is associated with the data indicating that the effect is not executed. Regarding the point that is neither 7777 nor 33333, 100 (0 to 99) effect random value values 21 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. Regarding the point that is neither 7777 nor 3333, no random number value 21 for effect is associated with the data indicating that the gauge operation specific advance notice effect is executed.

With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation display when executing the gauge operation performance, the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect. Before, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect showing the mode of progress after the operation. In addition, when the variable display is to be stopped at a symbol corresponding to the loss, a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation is executed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect. To regulate.

The above is the details of this embodiment. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when the gauge operation effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first and second embodiments described above, when the second accessory operation effect is executed, the specific notice effect can be executed regardless of whether the jackpot determination result is a jackpot or a loss. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not the specific advance notice effect is executed changes according to the jackpot determination result.

In the first and second embodiments and the present embodiment, the contents of the second character specific notice effect execution determination table referred to in step S1652-1 of the second character specific notice effect selection process (FIG. 57) are different. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a second accessory specific notice effect execution determination table. In the second accessory specific notice effect execution determination table of the present embodiment, a set of the effect random value 6 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is developed as a jackpot determination result. It is stored separately for each combination of presence / absence and the corresponding one.

The combination in which the jackpot determination result in this table is lost and has a development is associated with the data indicating that 100 (0 to 99) effect random values 6 do not execute the specific advance notice effect. Further, for the combination in which the jackpot determination result is lost and there is no development, 100 (0 to 99) effect random value values 6 are associated with data indicating that the specific advance notice effect is not executed. For those whose jackpot determination results are lost, no effect random number value 6 is associated with the data indicating that the specific advance notice effect is executed.

With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 is to execute the second accessory operation effect, the second accessory operation effect is to be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot in the variation display. Prior to the operation of the effect button 35 in the above, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation. In addition, when the variable display is to be stopped at a symbol corresponding to the loss, a specific advance notice effect indicating the mode of progress after the operation is executed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the second accessory operation effect. Regulate what is done.

The above is the details of this embodiment. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when the gauge operation effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol.

Although the first to third embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the following modifications may be added to such embodiments.

(1) In the first to third embodiments, the number of appearance timings (timing of pressing the effect button 35) of the image of the effect button 35 in the timing operation effect is four. However, the number of appearance timings of the images of the effect button 35 may be 3 or less, or 5 or more.

(2) In the first to third embodiments, the number of back button operation determination timings in the step-up back button operation effect is four. However, the number of back button operation determination timings may be 3 or less, or 5 or more.

(3) In the first to third embodiments, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are developed from the normal reach effect. However, an effect that develops from a normal reach effect to an SP reach effect and develops from an SP reach effect to an SPSP reach effect may be executed as a symbol variation effect.

(4) In the promotion effect of the first to third embodiments, the notification condition is that the continuous hit operation is performed within the operation reception valid period of the continuous hit operation, and the number of repeated hits within the operation reception valid period is a predetermined number (30). When it reached the number of times), it began to progress to promotion success production or promotion failure production. On the other hand, within the operation acceptance valid period, a plurality of continuous hit determination timings are provided, and the effect button 35 is pressed at all or a part of the continuous hit determination timings (the effect button on edge at the continuous hit determination timing). When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the storage area is 1), the promotion success effect or the promotion failure effect may be advanced. Further, in this case, when the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 and the continuous hit determination timing match, the effect of notifying the operation result in the effect mode corresponding to the match between the operation timing and the continuous hit determination timing (for example, " It is possible to execute the effect of displaying the character image "Don Pisha"), and when the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 and the continuous hit judgment timing do not match, the effect according to the fact that the operation timing and the continuous hit judgment timing do not match. It is possible to execute an effect of notifying the operation result in a mode (for example, an effect of displaying a character image of "No"), and the operation of the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period including the continuous hit determination timing. In such a case, the execution of the effect of notifying the operation result (for example, the effect of displaying the character image of "Don Pisha" or "No", the promotion success effect, and one or more of the promotion failure effects) is restricted. You may do so.

(6) In the timing operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. In this case, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and the execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area was 1 at two timings, that is, slightly before the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 and the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35. In this case, it may be considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(7) In the reach back button operation effect of the first to third embodiments, when the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the timing of establishment of reach is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. In addition, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the timing of establishment of the reach, and the execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, when the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings, that is, the timing slightly before the establishment of the reach and the timing of the establishment of the reach, the establishment of the reach is established. It is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the timing of, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(8) In the step-up back button operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is a predetermined value. In the above case, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the step-up back button operation determination timing, and the execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, when the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings, that is, a timing slightly before the step-up back button operation determination timing and a step-up back button operation determination timing. , It is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the step-up back button operation determination timing, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(9) In the first character operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific advance notice effect may be executed after the start of the first character operation effect and the start of the operation acceptance valid period. It was the previous time. _{However, the execution time of the specific advance notice effect of the first accessory} operation effect may be set before the start of execution of the first accessory operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t AY0 in FIG. 10).

(10) In the second character operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific advance notice effect may be executed after the start of the second character operation effect and the start of the operation acceptance valid period. It was the previous time. However, the execution time of the specific advance notice effect of the second accessory operation effect may be set before the start of execution of the second accessory operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _SY0 in FIG. 11).

(11) In the dialogue operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific advance notice effect may be executed at a time after the start of the dialogue operation effect and before the start of the operation reception valid period. .. However, the execution time of the specific advance notice effect of the dialogue operation effect may be set before the start of execution of the dialogue operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _{SR0 in FIG. 15).}

(12) In the roulette operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific advance notice effect may be executed at a time after the start of the roulette operation effect and before the start of the operation reception valid period. .. However, the execution time of the specific advance notice effect of the roulette operation effect may be set before the start of execution of the roulette operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _{LR0 in FIG. 16).}

(13) In the gauge operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the specific advance notice effect may be executed at a time after the start of the gauge operation effect and before the start of the operation acceptance valid period. .. However, the execution time of the specific advance notice effect of the gauge operation effect may be set before the start of execution of the gauge operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _{GG0 in FIG. 17).}

1 ... Game machine, 2 ... Game board, 14 ... 1st start port, 14a ... 1st start port detection switch, 15 ... 2nd start port, 15a ... 2nd start port detection switch, 16 ... 1st big prize opening, 16a ... 1st prize opening detection switch, 17 ... 2nd prize opening, 17a ... 2nd prize opening detection switch, 20 ... 1st special symbol display device, 21 ... 2nd special symbol display device, 31 ... image display Device, 110 ... Main control board, 110a ... Main CPU, 110b ... Main ROM, 110c ... Main RAM, 120 ... Production control board, 120a ... Sub CPU, 120b ... Sub ROM, 120c ... Sub RAM, 150 ... Image control board

Claims (1)

Operation means and
Judgment means for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the establishment of the starting conditions,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display means.
When the determination means determines that the jackpot has been won, the symbol display control means stops and displays the symbol, and then the special game execution means that executes the special game corresponding to the winning jackpot.
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the dialogue operation effect in which the dialogue effect progresses in response to the predetermined operation on the operation means within the operation reception valid period and the predetermined operation on the operation means within the operation reception valid period A plurality of effects including a non-serif operation effect that is an effect in which an effect different from the dialogue effect progresses and is executed after the dialogue operation effect, and a specific advance notice effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation. A production control means for causing the production means to execute one or more of the productions of
When the effect control means executes the non-speech operation effect as an effect during variable display, which is supposed to stop at a symbol indicating that the determination result is a big hit, before the operation acceptance valid period is reached. As an effect during the variable display, which makes it possible to execute the specific advance notice effect and stops at a symbol indicating that the determination result is not a big hit, according to the operation of the operation means among the non-line operation effects. When the roulette operation effect for displaying the outcome of the roulette is executed, the execution of the specific advance notice effect is restricted before the operation reception valid period is reached, and the operation of the operation means in the non-line operation effect is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that when a gauge operation effect in which the gauge progress amount is increased accordingly is executed, a regulatory means that does not restrict the execution of the specific advance notice effect before the operation acceptance valid period is reached.

Images